advertisement
COLOR LASERJET ENTERPRISE CM4540
MFP SERIES
User Guide
HP Color LaserJet Enterprise CM4540
MFP Series
User Guide
Copyright and License
© 2010 Copyright Hewlett-Packard
Development Company, L.P.
Reproduction, adaptation, or translation without prior written permission is prohibited, except as allowed under the copyright laws.
The information contained herein is subject to change without notice.
The only warranties for HP products and services are set forth in the express warranty statements accompanying such products and services. Nothing herein should be construed as constituting an additional warranty. HP shall not be liable for technical or editorial errors or omissions contained herein.
Part number: CC419-90901
Edition 2, 10/2010
Trademark Credits
Adobe ® , Acrobat ® , and PostScript ® are trademarks of Adobe Systems Incorporated.
Corel® is a trademark or registered trademark of Corel Corporation or Corel
Corporation Limited.
Intel® Core™ is a trademark of Intel
Corporation in the U.S. and other countries.
Microsoft®, Windows®, Windows® XP, and Windows Vista® are U.S. registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation.
PANTONE® is Pantone, Inc's checkstandard trademark for color.
UNIX ® is a registered trademark of The
Open Group.
ENERGY STAR and the ENERGY STAR mark are registered U.S. marks.
Conventions used in this guide
TIP:
Tips provide helpful hints or shortcuts.
NOTE:
Notes provide important information to explain a concept or to complete a task.
CAUTION:
Cautions indicate procedures that you should follow to avoid losing data or damaging the product.
WARNING!
Warnings alert you to specific procedures that you should follow to avoid personal injury, catastrophic loss of data, or extensive damage to the product.
ENWW iii
iv Conventions used in this guide ENWW
Table of contents
ENWW v
vi
Install software for Mac computers connected directly to the product .............. 58
Install software for Mac computers on a wired network ................................. 59
Configure the IP address ............................................................ 59
Install the software ..................................................................... 60
Open the HP Printer Utility .......................................................... 64
HP Utility features ...................................................................... 64
ENWW
HP Embedded Web Server ........................................................................ 65
View or change network settings ................................................................ 78
Set or change the network password .......................................................... 78
Manually configure IPv4 TCP/IP parameters from the control panel ................ 79
Manually configure IPv6 TCP/IP parameters from the control panel ................ 80
Load Tray 2 and optional Trays 3, 4, and 5 with standard-size paper ........................... 92
Load Tray 2 and optional Trays 3, 4, and 5 with custom-size paper .............................. 93
ENWW vii
viii
Paper orientation for loading Tray 1 ........................................................... 98
Paper orientation for loading Tray 2 or Trays 3, 4, and 5 ........................... 100
Print when a print cartridge is at estimated end of life ................................. 108
Enable or disable the Very Low Settings options from the control panel ......... 108
Inspect the print cartridge for damage ...................................................... 117
ENWW
ENWW
Use a printing shortcut with Windows ....................................................... 131
Select the page size with Windows .......................................................... 135
Select a custom page size with Windows .................................................. 135
Select the paper type with Windows ........................................................ 135
Select the paper tray with Windows ......................................................... 135
Select the gloss level with Windows ......................................................... 135
Select an output bin with Windows .......................................................... 154
Select staple options with Windows .......................................................... 155
Create a stored job with Windows ........................................................... 157
Set job storage options with Windows ...................................................... 159
Print one copy for proof before printing all the copies .................. 159
Temporarily store a personal job on the product and print it later . . 160
Temporarily store a job on the product ....................................... 160
Permanently store a job on the product ...................................... 160
Receive notification when someone prints a stored job ................. 161
Set the user name for a stored job ............................................. 161
Specify a name for the stored job .............................................. 161
Print business graphics or marketing material ............................................. 162
Supported glossy paper ........................................................... 162
Print weatherproof maps and outdoor signs ............................................... 163
ix
x
Supported tough paper ............................................................ 163
Optimize the copy image for text or pictures ............................................. 179
Check the scanner glass for dirt or smudges .............................................. 179
Adjust the copy lightness/darkness ........................................................... 181
ENWW
Change default scan/send settings from the product control panel .............................. 194
Send a scanned document to a folder in the product memory ..................................... 196
Send a scanned document to one or more e-mail addresses ........................ 200
Add contacts to the address book from the product control panel . . 202
Send a document to e-mail by using the address book ................. 203
Set or verify the date/time format ............................................................. 209
HP MFP Digital Sending Software Configuration Utility ............................... 211
Fax Setup Wizard ................................................................... 211
Fax dialing settings .................................................................. 213
General fax send settings ......................................................... 217
Set billing codes ...................................................................... 219
Image preview ........................................................................ 221
Set the outgoing fax resolution .................................................. 221
Original sides ......................................................................... 222
Notification ............................................................................ 222
Content orientation .................................................................. 223
Original size .......................................................................... 223
ENWW xi
xii
Image adjustment .................................................................... 224
Optimize text/picture .............................................................. 224
Job build ................................................................................ 225
Blank page suppression ........................................................... 225
Set the ringer volume ............................................................... 226
Set rings-to-answer .................................................................. 226
Set fax receive speed ............................................................... 227
Set ring interval ....................................................................... 227
Set ring frequency ................................................................... 227
Enable or disable the fax printing schedule ............................................... 228
Create a blocked-fax list ........................................................... 229
Delete numbers from the blocked-fax list ..................................... 229
Initiate polling receive .............................................................. 229
Notification ............................................................................ 230
Stamp received faxes (incoming faxes) ...................................... 231
Set fit-to-page .......................................................................... 231
Set the paper selection ............................................................. 232
Set the output bin .................................................................... 232
Set the sides ........................................................................... 233
Send a fax by entering numbers manually ................................................. 237
Send a fax using speed dial .................................................................... 238
Search a speed-dial list by name .............................................................. 238
Send a fax by using fax address book numbers ......................................... 239
Fax address book search ........................................................................ 240
Cancel the current fax transmission ........................................................... 240
ENWW
Delete a single number from the speed dial list .......................................... 244
Add a number to an existing speed dial list ............................................... 245
What type of phone line are you using? .................................................... 249
Are you using a surge-protection device? .................................................. 249
Does your phone line have a call-waiting feature? ...................................... 250
Settings in the Troubleshooting menu ........................................................ 261
ENWW xiii
xiv
Open the HP Embedded Web Server by using a network connection .......................... 266
Encryption support: HP Encrypted High Performance Hard Disks ................................. 273
ENWW
ENWW
Clear jams in the document feeder ........................................................... 292
Clear paper jams in the stapler ................................................................ 293
Clear jams in the output bin area ............................................................. 297
Clear jams from under the top cover ......................................................... 297
Clear jams in Trays 2, 3, 4, or 5 .............................................................. 304
Clear jams in the lower-right door (Trays 3, 4, or 5) ................................... 305
The Open from USB menu does not open when you insert the USB accessory ............... 314
The file that you want to print is not listed in the Open from USB menu ........................ 315
The computer is using the incorrect IP address for the product ...................... 316
The computer is unable to communicate with the product ............................ 317
The product is using incorrect link and duplex settings for the network .......... 317
New software programs might be causing compatibility problems ................ 317
The computer or workstation might be set up incorrectly .............................. 317
xv
xvi
The product is disabled, or other network settings are incorrect .................... 317
The product name does not appear in the product list in the Print & Fax list .................. 319
You are using a generic printer driver when using a USB connection ........................... 320
ENWW
United States and Puerto Rico .................................................................. 342
Multiple returns (more than one cartridge) .................................. 342
Single returns .......................................................................... 342
Shipping ................................................................................ 342
Disposal of waste equipment by users in private households in the European Union ...... 344
ENWW xvii
xviii ENWW
1 Product basics
●
●
●
●
ENWW 1
Product comparison
CM4540 MFP
CC419A
●
Prints up to 42 pages per minute (ppm) on
Letter-size paper and up to 40 ppm on A4size paper
●
●
Automatic two-sided printing
500-sheet, face-down output bin
●
Scans in grayscale up to 36.5 images per minute (ipm) for Letter-size pages and up to
35 ipm for A4-size pages
●
Hi-speed USB 2.0 port
●
HP Jetdirect embedded print server for connecting to a 10/100/1000Base-TX network
●
Scans in color up to 21 images per minute
(ipm) for Letter-size pages and up to 20 ipm for A4-size pages
●
USB port on the control panel for walk-up printing and scanning
●
Digital sending features, including sending to e-mail, network folders, and a USB flash drive.
●
Color touchscreen display
●
100-sheet multipurpose input tray (Tray 1)
●
500-sheet input tray (Tray 2)
●
Hinged control panel to adjust the viewing angle
●
1280 megabytes (MB) of random access memory (RAM)
●
50-sheet document feeder for copying and scanning
●
HP Encrypted High Performance Hard Disk
●
Flatbed scanner that holds pages up to
Legal size
●
Hardware integration pocket on the control panel for adding solutions
●
Color access control
This model has the same features as the CM4540 MFP model, with the following differences:
●
HP 500-sheet Paper Feeder (Tray 3) and cabinet (increases the total input capacity to 1100 pages)
●
Analog faxing with the built-in HP Analog Fax Accessory 500
CM4540f MFP
CC420A
This model has the same features as the CM4540 MFP model, with the following differences:
●
HP 3 x 500-sheet Paper Feeder (Trays 3, 4, and 5) and stand (increases the total input capacity to 2100 pages)
●
HP 900-sheet 3-bin Stapling Mailbox (replaces the 500-sheet output bin)
●
Analog faxing with the built-in HP Analog Fax Accessory 500
CM4540fskm MFP
CC421A
2 Chapter 1 Product basics ENWW
Environmental features
Duplex Save paper by using duplex printing as your default print setting.
Print multiple pages per sheet Save paper by printing two or more pages of a document side-by-side on one sheet of paper.
Access this feature through the printer driver.
Recycling Reduce waste by using recycled paper.
Recycle print cartridges by using the HP return process.
Energy savings
HP Smart Web printing
Job storage
Save energy by initiating sleep mode for the product.
Use HP Smart Web printing to select, store, and organize text and graphics from multiple
Web pages and then edit and print exactly what you see onscreen. It gives you the control you need for printing meaningful information while minimizing waste.
Download HP Smart Web printing from this Web site: www.hp.com/go/smartweb .
Use the job storage features to manage print jobs. By using job storage, you activate printing while you are at the shared product, eliminating lost print jobs that are then reprinted.
ENWW
Environmental features
3
Accessibility features
The product includes several features that aid you with accessibility issues.
●
Online user guide that is compatible with text screen-readers.
●
Print cartridges can be installed and removed by using one hand.
●
All doors and covers can be opened by using one hand.
●
Paper can be loaded in Tray 1 by using one hand.
●
The control-panel display rotates up to adjust the viewing angle.
4 Chapter 1 Product basics ENWW
Product views
Front view
CM4540 MFP
2
3
4
1
5
6
9
7
8
11
10
8
9
6
7
10
11
1
4
5
2
3
Standard output bin
Document feeder cover (access for clearing jams)
Document feeder input tray
Document feeder output bin
Control panel with color touchscreen display
Top-cover-release lever (access for clearing jams)
Handle for the right door (access for clearing jams)
On-off button
Handle for Tray 1
Tray 2
Handle for the front cover (access to the print cartridges and the toner collection unit)
ENWW
Product views
5
CM4540f MFP
1
2
14
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
12
13
14
8
9
10
11
6
7
4
5
1
2
3
Standard output bin
Document feeder cover (access for clearing jams)
Document feeder input tray
Document feeder output bin
Control panel with color touchscreen display
Top-cover-release lever (access for clearing jams)
Handle for the right door (access for clearing jams)
On-off button
Handle for Tray 1
Tray 2
Tray 3
Handle for lower-right door (access for clearing jams)
Storage cabinet
Handle for the front cover (access to the print cartridges and the toner collection unit)
6 Chapter 1 Product basics ENWW
CM4540fskm MFP
2
1
3
17
16
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
15
11
12
13
14
7
8
9
10
15
16
17
5
6
3
4
1
2
14
Mailbox output bins
HP Stapling Mailbox accessory
Document feeder cover (access for clearing jams)
Document feeder input tray
Document feeder output bin
Control panel with color touchscreen display
Top-cover-release lever (access for clearing jams)
Handle for the right door (access for clearing jams)
On-off button
Handle for Tray 1
Tray 2
Tray 3
Handle for lower-right door (access for clearing jams)
Tray 4
Tray 5
Handle for the front cover (access to the print cartridges and the toner collection unit)
Stapler release lever (access to the staple cartridge)
ENWW
Product views
7
Back view
1
2
Interface ports
Power connection
2
1
8 Chapter 1 Product basics ENWW
Interface ports
5
6
3
4
1
2
7
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
Hi-speed USB 2.0 printing port
Foreign interface harness for connecting third-party devices
Local area network (LAN) Ethernet (RJ-45) network port
USB port for connecting external USB devices
Fax port (RJ-11)
EIO interface expansion slot
Slot for a cable-type security lock
Serial number and model number location
The model number and serial number are listed on an identification label located on the back of the product. The serial number contains information about the country/region of origin, the product version, production code, and the production number of the product.
Model name
CM4540 MFP
CM4540f MFP
CM4540fskm MFP
Model number
CC419A
CC420A
CC421A
ENWW
Product views
9
Control-panel layout
1 2 3 4 5
6
7
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
9
8
14 13 12 11 10
Hardware integration pocket
Touchscreen graphical display
Brightness-adjustment button
Numeric keypad
Sleep button
Reset button
Area for adding third-party security devices
Use the touchscreen to open and set up all product functions.
Use this button to increase or decrease the brightness of the touchscreen display.
Use this area to specify the number of copies and other numeric values.
If the product is inactive for a long period of time, it automatically enters a sleep mode. To place the product into sleep mode or to reactivate the product, press the
Sleep button.
Resets the job settings to factory or user-defined default values.
Stop button
Start button
Pause button
Attention light
Stops the active job and opens the Job Status screen.
Begins a copy job, starts digital sending, starts a fax job, or continues a job that has been interrupted.
Use this button to indicate a required pause for a fax number.
Indicates that the product has a condition that requires intervention. Examples include an empty paper tray or an error message.
Data light
Ready light
Indicates that the product is receiving data.
Indicates that the product is ready to begin processing any job.
Backspace button Clears the active text or number field, and returns values to the default settings.
USB port (on the bottom edge of the hinged control panel) Connect a USB flash drive for walk-up printing and scanning.
10 Chapter 1 Product basics ENWW
Control-panel help
The product has a built-in Help system that explains how to use each screen. To open the Help system, touch the Help button in the upper-right corner of the screen.
For some screens, the Help opens to a global menu where you can search for specific topics. You can browse through the menu structure by touching the buttons in the menu.
For screens that contain settings for individual jobs, the Help opens to a topic that explains the options for that screen.
If the product alerts you of an error or warning, touch the error or warning button to open a message that describes the problem. The message also contains instructions to help solve the problem.
ENWW
Product views
11
Touchscreen navigation
The home screen provides access to the product features, and it indicates the current status of the product.
NOTE:
HP regularly updates features that are available in the product firmware. To take advantage of the most current features, update the product firmware. To download the most recent firmware upgrade, go to www.hp.com/go/cljcm4540mfp_firmware .
NOTE:
Depending on how the product has been configured, the features that appear on the home screen can vary.
2 3 4 5
HP LaserJet
6
1
DDMMYYYY 00.00 AM
1
9
Features
2
3
Product status
Copy type
8 7
Depending on how the product is configured, the features that appear in this area can include any of the following items:
●
Copy
●
Fax
●
●
Save to Network Folder
●
Save to USB
●
Save to Device Memory
●
Open from USB
●
Open from Device Memory
●
Quick Sets
●
Job Status
●
Supplies
●
Trays
●
Administration
●
Device Maintenance
The status line provides information about the overall product status.
Shows whether copies are color.
12 Chapter 1 Product basics ENWW
4
5
6
7
Copy count
Help button
Scroll bar
Sign In or Sign Out
8
9
Network Address
Date and time
The copy count box indicates the number of copies that the product is set to make.
Touch the Help button to open the embedded help system.
Touch the up or down arrows on the scroll bar to see the complete list of available features.
Touch the Sign In button to access secured features.
Touch the Sign Out button to sign out of the product if you have signed in for access to secured features. After you sign out, the product restores all options to the default settings.
Touch the Network Address button to find information about the network connection.
NOTE:
Depending on the product configuration, this button might not appear.
The current date and time appear here. You can select the format that the product uses to show the date and time, for example 12-hour format or 24-hour format.
ENWW
Product views
13
Buttons on the touchscreen
The status line on the touchscreen provides information about the product status. Various buttons can appear in this area. The following table describes each button.
Home button. Touch the home button to go to the Home screen from any other screen.
Start button. Touch the Start button to begin the action for the feature that you are using.
NOTE:
The name of this button changes for each feature. For example, in the Copy feature, the button is named Start Copy .
Stop button. If the product is processing a print or fax job, the Stop button appears instead of the Start button. Touch the Stop button to halt the current job. The product prompts you to cancel the job or to resume it.
Warning button. The warning button appears when the product has a problem but can continue functioning. Touch the warning button to see a message that describes the problem. The message also has instructions for solving the problem.
Help button. Touch the help button to open the built-in online Help system.
14 Chapter 1 Product basics ENWW
2 Control panel menus
●
●
●
ENWW 15
Control panel menus
The product has many menus on the control panel Home screen to help you perform tasks and configure settings.
NOTE:
To learn about each menu option, touch the Help button in the upper-right corner of the screen for that option.
NOTE:
HP regularly updates features that are available in the product firmware. To take advantage of the most current features, update the product firmware. To download the most recent firmware upgrade, go to www.hp.com/go/cljcm4540mfp_firmware .
Table 2-1 Menus on the Home screen
Menu Description
Initial Setup
Copy
Fax
Save to USB
Save to Network Folder
Open from USB
This menu appears when you first turn the product on. Use it to set the language, to set the date and time, to configure essential fax and e-mail settings, and to enable the Open from
USB feature.
After you have completed the initial setup, you have the option to hide this menu.
Use this menu to make copies of documents.
Several options are available for customizing jobs. These settings are temporary. After you have finished the job, the product returns to the default settings.
Use this menu to send a fax from the product. This menu is available only for products that have a fax accessory. For this menu to appear on the control panel, this feature must be set up by using the Initial Setup menu or by using the HP Embedded Web Server.
Several options are available for customizing jobs. These settings are temporary. After you have finished the job, the product returns to the default settings.
Use this menu to scan documents and send them as an e-mail attachment. For this menu to appear on the control panel, this feature must be set up by using the Initial Setup menu, by using the HP Scan to Email Setup Wizard during software installation, or by using the HP
Embedded Web Server.
Several options are available for customizing jobs. These settings are temporary. After you have finished the job, the product returns to the default settings.
Use this menu to scan documents and save them on a USB flash drive. For this menu to appear on the control panel, this feature must be set up by using the HP Embedded Web Server.
Several options are available for customizing jobs. These settings are temporary. After you have finished the job, the product returns to the default settings.
Use this menu to scan documents and save them to a shared folder on the network. For this menu to appear on the control panel, this feature must be set up by using the HP Embedded
Web Server or by using the HP Save to Folder Setup Wizard during software installation.
Several options are available for customizing jobs. These settings are temporary. After you have finished the job, the product returns to the default settings.
Use this menu to open and print a document stored on a USB flash drive. For this menu to appear on the control panel, this feature must be set up by using the Initial Setup menu.
16 Chapter 2 Control panel menus ENWW
Table 2-1 Menus on the Home screen (continued)
Menu Description
Save to Device Memory
Open from Device Memory
Quick Sets
Job Status
Trays
Supplies
Administration
Device Maintenance
Use this menu to scan documents and save them to the hard disk in the product.
Several options are available for customizing jobs. These settings are temporary. After you have finished the job, the product returns to the default settings.
Use this menu to open and print a document stored on the product hard drive.
Use this menu to access preset job options for jobs that you scan and send by fax or e-mail, or jobs that you scan and save to a USB flash drive, the product hard disk, or to a folder on the network.
Set up Quick Sets by using the HP Embedded Web Server or HP Web Jetadmin.
Use this menu to see the status of all active jobs.
Use this menu to see the current status of each tray. You can also use this menu to configure the paper size and type settings for each tray.
Use this menu to see the current status of product supplies, such as print cartridges. Information about ordering new supplies is also available.
Use this menu to print reports and configure default settings for the product. The Administration menu has several sub-menus. See the sections that follow for details about these menus.
Use this menu to calibrate and clean the product and to backup and restore data. See the sections that follow for details about these menus.
ENWW
Control panel menus
17
Administration menu
You can perform basic product setup by using the Administration menu. Use the HP Embedded Web
Server for more advanced product setup. To open the HP Embedded Web Server, enter the product IP address or host name in the address bar of a Web browser.
Reports menu
To display: At the product control panel, select the Administration menu, and then select the Reports menu.
Table 2-2 Reports menu
First level
Configuration/Status Pages
Second level
Administration Menu Map
Fax Reports
Current Settings Page
Configuration Page
Supplies Status Page
Usage Page
File Directory Page
Color Usage Job Log
Fax Activity Log
Billing Codes Report
Blocked Fax List
Speed Dial List
Fax Call Report
Values
View
View
View
View
View
View
View
View
View
View
View
18 Chapter 2 Control panel menus ENWW
Table 2-2 Reports menu (continued)
First level Second level
Other Pages Demonstration Page
Color Samples for RGB
CMYK Values
PCL Font List
PS Font List
Values
General Settings menu
To display: At the product control panel, select the Administration menu, and then select the General
Settings menu.
In the following table, asterisks (*) indicate the factory default setting.
Table 2-3 General Settings menu
First level Second level Third level Fourth level Values
Date/Time Settings Date/Time Format
Date/Time
Date Format
Time Format
Date
Time
Time Zone
DD/MMM/YYYY
MMM/DD/YYYY
YYYY/MMM/DD
12 hour (AM/PM)
24 hours
Select the date from a pop-up calendar.
Select the time from a pop-up keypad.
Select the time zone from a list.
Checkbox
Energy Settings Sleep Schedule
Adjust for Daylight
Savings
A list of scheduled events displays.
Edit Delete
Event Type
Event Time
Wake Up
Sleep
ENWW
Administration menu
19
Table 2-3 General Settings menu (continued)
First level
Print Quality
Second level
Sleep Delay
Optimum Speed/Energy
Usage
Adjust Color
Third level
Image Registration Adjust Tray <X>
Auto Sense Behavior
Highlights
Midtones
Shadows
Tray 1 Sensing
Tray X Sensing
Fourth level
Event Days
Values
Select days of the week from a list.
Enter a value between 1 and 120 minutes.
The default value is 45 minutes.
Faster First Page *
Save Energy
Save More Energy
Save Most Energy
-5 to 5 Cyan Density
Magenta Density
Yellow Density
Black Density
Cyan Density
Magenta Density
Yellow Density
Black Density
Cyan Density
Magenta Density
Yellow Density
Black Density
Print Test Page
X1 Shift
Y1 Shift
X2 Shift
Y2 Shift
-5 to 5
-5 to 5
-5.00 mm to 5.00 mm
Full sensing
Expanded sensing *
Transparency Only
Expanded sensing
Transparency Only
20 Chapter 2 Control panel menus ENWW
Table 2-3 General Settings menu (continued)
First level Second level
Adjust Paper Types
Third level
Select from a list of paper types that the product supports. The available options are the same for each paper type.
Fourth level
Print Mode
Resistance Mode
Optimize Normal Paper
Heavy Paper
Envelope Control
Environment
Line Voltage
Tray 1
Values
Select from a list of print modes.
Humidity Mode
Pre-Rotation Mode
Fuser Temp Mode
Paper Curl Mode
Normal mode
Up
Down
Normal
High
Off
On
Normal
Up
Down
Normal
Reduced
Standard *
Smooth
Standard *
Smooth
Normal *
Reduced Temperature multipurpose mode
Normal *
Low Temp
Normal *
Low Voltage
Normal *
Alternate
ENWW
Administration menu
21
Table 2-3 General Settings menu (continued)
First level
Jam Recovery
Manage Stored Jobs
Second level
Edge Control
Quick Copy Job Storage
Limit
Third level Fourth level Values
Background
Uniformity Control
Tracking Control
Registration
Transfer Control
Fuser Temp
Alternate 1
Alternate 2
Alternate 3
Normal *
Alternate
Off
Light
Normal *
Maximum
Auto *
Off
On
1-300
Default = 32
Normal *
Alternate 1
Alternate 2
Alternate 3
Normal *
Alternate 1
Alternate 2
Alternate 3
On *
Off
Normal *
Alternate
Normal *
22 Chapter 2 Control panel menus ENWW
Table 2-3 General Settings menu (continued)
First level Second level Third level
Quick Copy Job Held
Timeout
Hold Off Print Job
Restore Factory Settings
Restrict Color
Default Folder Name for
Stored Jobs
Sort Stored Jobs By
Fourth level Values
Off *
1 Hour
4 Hours
1 Day
1 Week
Job Name *
Date
Enabled *
Disabled
Address Book
Calibration
Copy
Digital Send
Fax
General
Security
Enable color
Disable color
Color if allowed
Copy Settings menu
To display: At the product control panel, select the Administration menu, and then select the Copy
Settings menu.
In the following table, asterisks (*) indicate the factory default setting.
ENWW
Administration menu
23
Table 2-4 Copy Settings menu
First level
Image Preview
NOTE:
You might need to upgrade the firmware to view this menu.
Sides
Second level
Color/Black
Orientation
Color Mode
Staple/Collate
NOTE:
For models that include an HP
Stapling Mailbox
Staple
Collate
Collate
NOTE:
For models that do not include an
HP Stapling Mailbox
Reduce/Enlarge Scaling
24 Chapter 2 Control panel menus
Auto Include Margins
Values
Make optional *
Require preview
Disable preview
1-sided original, 1-sided output *
1-sided original, 2-sided output
2-sided original, 1-sided output
2-sided original, 2-sided output
Portrait *
Landscape
Auto detect *
Color
Black
None
Top left
Top right
Off
On *
Collate on (Sets in page order) *
Collate off (Pages grouped)
Automatic
Range X-Y (25-400%)
100%
75%
50%
125%
150%
200%
ENWW
Table 2-4 Copy Settings menu (continued)
First level Second level
Paper Selection
Image Adjustment
Content Orientation
Darkness
Contrast
Background Cleanup
Sharpness
Orientation
2-Sided Format
Output Bin
Optimize Text/Picture
Pages per Sheet
Original Size
Optimize For *
Page Order
Add Page Borders
Borders on Each Page
Original Sides
ENWW
Values
Automatic
Tray 1: [Size], [Type]
Tray <X>: [Size], [Type]
Portrait *
Landscape
Book-style
Flip-style
Book-style original; Flip-style copy
Flip-style original; Book-style copy
Select from a list of output bins.
Manually adjust *
Text
Printed picture
Photograph
One (1)
Two (2)
Four (4)
Right, then down
Down, then right
Auto detect *
Select from a list of sizes that the product supports.
1-sided *
2-sided
Administration menu
25
Table 2-4 Copy Settings menu (continued)
First level Second level
Edge-To-Edge
Job Build
Values
Normal (recommended) *
Edge-To-Edge output
Job Build off *
Job Build on
26 Chapter 2 Control panel menus ENWW
Scan/Digital Send Settings menu
To display: At the product control panel, select the Administration menu, and then select the Scan/
Digital Send Settings menu.
In the following table, asterisks (*) indicate the factory default setting.
Table 2-5 Scan/Digital Send Settings menu
First level Second level Third level
E-mail Setup Wizard E-mail Settings
Default Save to Network
Folder Options
Default Save to USB
Options
NOTE:
The same options are available for each of these features, except where noted.
E-mail Setup
NOTE:
E-mail Settings only
Default Job Options Image Preview
NOTE:
You might need to upgrade the firmware to view this menu.
Default File Name
Document File Type
Optimize Text/Picture
Output Quality
Original Sides
Fourth level
Optimize For :
Orientation
Values
Make optional *
Require preview
Disable preview
Select from a list of file types.
Manually adjust *
Text
Printed picture
Photograph
High (large file)
Medium *
Low (small file)
1-sided
2-sided
Portrait *
Landscape
Book-style
Flip-style
ENWW
Administration menu
27
Table 2-5 Scan/Digital Send Settings menu (continued)
First level Second level Third level
Resolution
Content Orientation
Color/Black
Fourth level
Orientation
2-Sided Format
Original Size
Notification
Image Adjustment
Job Build
Blank Page Suppression
Darkness
Contrast
Background Cleanup
Sharpness
Do not notify *
Notify when job completes
Notify only if job fails
E-mail *
Job Build off *
Job Build on *
Enabled
Disabled *
Values
600 dpi
400 dpi
300 dpi
200 dpi
150 dpi *
75 dpi
Portrait *
Landscape
Book-style *
Flip-style
Auto detect
Color
Black/Gray
Black
28 Chapter 2 Control panel menus ENWW
Table 2-5 Scan/Digital Send Settings menu (continued)
First level Second level Third level
Digital Send Service
Setup
Allow Usage of Digital
Sending Software (DSS)
Server
Allow Transfer to New
Digital Sending Software
(DSS) Server
Fourth level Values
Fax Settings menu
To display: At the product control panel, select the Administration menu, and then select the Fax
Settings menu.
In the following table, asterisks (*) indicate the factory default setting.
Table 2-6 Fax Settings menu
First level Second level
Fax Send Settings Fax Send Setup
Third level
Fax Setup Wizard
Fax Dialing Settings
General Fax Send
Settings
Fourth level
Fax Dial Volume
Dialing Mode
Redial On Busy
Redial On No Answer
Redial Interval
Detect Dial Tone
Fax Send Speed
Dialing Prefix
PC Fax Send
Values
Off
Low *
High
Tone *
Pulse
Range: 0 – 9
Default = 3
Range: 0 - 2
Default = 0
1-5 Minutes
Default = 5 minutes
Fast
Medium
Slow
Enabled *
Disabled
ENWW
Administration menu
29
30
Table 2-6 Fax Settings menu (continued)
First level Second level
Default Job Options
Third level
Billing Codes
Image Preview
NOTE:
You might need to upgrade the firmware to view this menu.
Resolution
Original Sides
Fourth level Values
Fax Header
JBIG Compression
Prepend *
Overlay
Error Correction Mode Enabled *
Disabled
Fax Number Confirmation Enabled
Disabled *
Enabled *
Enable Billing Codes
Minimum Length
Default Billing Code
Allow users to edit billing codes
Disabled
Off *
On
Range: 1 – 16
Default = 1
Make optional *
Require preview
Disable preview
Orientation
Standard (100 x
200dpi) *
Fine (200 x 200dpi)
Superfine (300 x 300dpi)
1-sided *
2-sided
Portrait *
Landscape
Book-style *
Flip-style
Chapter 2 Control panel menus ENWW
Table 2-6 Fax Settings menu (continued)
First level Second level
Fax Receive Settings Fax Receive Setup
Third level
Notification
Content Orientation
Job Build
Blank Page Suppression
Rings To Answer
Ring Frequency
Ring Interval
Ringer Volume
Fourth level
Notification E-mail address
Include Thumbnail
Orientation
2-Sided Format
Original Size
Image Adjustment
Optimize Text/Picture
Darkness
Contrast
Background Cleanup
Sharpness
Optimize For :
Values
Do not notify *
Notify when job completes
Notify only if job fails
Off
Low *
High
Text
Printed picture
Photograph
Job Build off *
Job Build on
Disabled *
Enabled
Portrait *
Landscape
Book-style *
Flip-style
Select from a list of sizes that the product supports.
Manually adjust *
ENWW
Administration menu
31
Table 2-6 Fax Settings menu (continued)
First level
Fax Archive and
Forwarding
Second level
Fax Printing Schedule
Enable Fax Archiving
Third level
Fax Receive Speed
Incoming Fax Options
Stamp Received Faxes
Fit to Page
Paper Selection
Output Bin
Sides
Type of Fax Job to
Archive
Fourth level
Blocked Fax Numbers
Default Job Options
Schedule
Touch this to set up a fax printing schedule if you selected the Use Fax
Printing Schedule option.
Add (plus sign)
Edit
Fax Number to Block
Notification
Values
Fast
Medium
Slow
Always store faxes
Always print faxes *
Use Fax Printing Schedule
Print incoming faxes
Store incoming faxes
Event Time
Event Days
Do not notify
Notify when job completes
Notify only if job fails
Include Thumbnail
Enabled
Disabled *
Enabled *
Disabled
Automatic
Select from a list of the trays.
Select from a list of the bins.
1-sided
2-sided
Send and receive *
Send only
Receive only
32 Chapter 2 Control panel menus ENWW
Table 2-6 Fax Settings menu (continued)
First level Second level
Enable Fax Forwarding
Third level
Fax Archiving E-mail
Address
Type of Fax Job to
Forward
Fourth level Values
Send and receive
Send only
Receive only
Fax Forwarding Number
Print Settings menu
To display: At the product control panel, select the Administration menu, and then select the Print
Settings menu.
In the following table, asterisks (*) indicate the factory default setting.
Table 2-7 Print Settings menu
First level
Manual Feed
Second level
Courier Font
Wide A4
Print PS Errors
Print PDF Errors
Personality
PCL Form Length
Values
Enabled
Disabled *
Regular *
Dark
Enabled
Disabled *
Enabled
Disabled *
Enabled
Disabled *
Auto *
PCL
POSTSCRIPT
Range: 5 – 128
Default = 60
ENWW
Administration menu
33
Table 2-7 Print Settings menu (continued)
First level Second level
Orientation
Font Source
Font Number
Font Pitch
Font Point Size
Symbol Set
Append CR to LF
Suppress Blank Pages
Media Source Mapping
Values
Portrait *
Landscape
Internal *
Card slot 1
Card slot <X>
EIO <X> disk
USB
Range: 0 – 999
Default = 0
Range: 0.44 – 99.99
Default = 10
Range: 4.00 – 999.75
Default = 12.00
Select from a list of symbol sets.
No *
Yes
No *
Yes
Standard *
Classic
Print Options menu
To display: At the product control panel, select the Administration menu, and then select the Print
Options menu.
In the following table, asterisks (*) indicate the factory default setting.
Table 2-8 Print Options menu
First level
Number of Copies
Default Paper Size
Default Custom Paper Size
Second level
X Dimension
Values
Select from a list of sizes that the product supports.
34 Chapter 2 Control panel menus ENWW
Table 2-8 Print Options menu (continued)
First level Second level
Output Bin
Sides
Y Dimension
Use Inches
Use Millimeters
2-Sided Format
Enable Edge-To-Edge Override
Values
1-sided *
2-sided
Book-style *
Flip-style
Enabled
Disabled *
Display Settings menu
To display: At the product control panel, select the Administration menu, and then select the Display
Settings menu.
In the following table, asterisks (*) indicate the factory default setting.
Table 2-9 Display Settings menu
First level
Key Press Sound
Second level
Language Settings
Network Address Button
Sleep Mode
Inactivity Timeout
Language
Keyboard Layout
Values
On *
Off
Select from a list of languages that the product supports.
Each language has a default keyboard layout. To change it, select from a list of layouts.
Display
Hide
Disabled
Use sleep delay *
Use sleep schedule
Balance power savings/Wait time
Range: 10 – 300 seconds
Default = 60 seconds
ENWW
Administration menu
35
Table 2-9 Display Settings menu (continued)
First level Second level
Clearable Warnings
Continuable Events
Values
On
Job *
Auto continue (10 seconds) *
Press OK to continue
36 Chapter 2 Control panel menus ENWW
Manage Supplies menu
To display: At the product control panel, select the Administration menu, and then select the Manage
Supplies menu.
In the following table, asterisks (*) indicate the factory default setting.
Table 2-10 Manage Supplies menu
First level Second level
Supplies Status
Third level
Supply Settings Black Cartridge
Color Cartridges
Fuser Kit
Transfer Kit
Document Feeder Kit
Very Low Settings
Low Threshold Settings
Very Low Settings
Low Threshold Settings
Very Low Settings
Low Threshold Settings
Very Low Settings
Low Threshold Settings
Very Low Settings
Fourth level Values
View
Stop
Prompt to continue *
Continue
1-100%
Default = 10%
Stop
Prompt to continue *
Cyan Cartridge
Magenta Cartridge
Yellow Cartridge
Continue
1-100%
Default = 10%
Stop
Prompt to continue *
Continue
1-100%
Default = 10%
Stop
Prompt to continue *
Continue
1-100%
Default = 10%
Stop
Prompt to continue *
Continue
ENWW
Administration menu
37
Table 2-10 Manage Supplies menu (continued)
First level Second level Third level
Low Threshold Settings
Supply Messages
Reset Supplies
Toner Collection Unit
Color/Black Mix
Low Message
New Document Feeder Kit
Very Low Settings
Fourth level Values
1-100%
Default = 10%
Stop *
Prompt to continue
Continue
Auto *
Mostly Color Pages
Mostly Black Pages
On *
Off
No
Yes
Manage Trays menu
To display: At the product control panel, select the Administration menu, and then select the Manage
Trays menu.
In the following table, asterisks (*) indicate the factory default setting.
Table 2-11 Manage Trays menu
First level
Use Requested Tray
Manually Feed Prompt
Size/Type Prompt
Use Another Tray
Alternative Letterhead Mode
Blank Pages
Values
Exclusively *
First
Always *
Unless loaded
Display *
Do not display
Enabled *
Disabled
Disabled *
Enabled
Auto *
Yes
38 Chapter 2 Control panel menus ENWW
Table 2-11 Manage Trays menu (continued)
First level
Image Rotation
Override A4/Letter
Values
Standard
Alternate
Yes *
No
Stapler/Stacker Settings menu
To display: At the product control panel, select the Administration menu, and then select the Stapler/
Stacker Settings menu.
In the following table, asterisks (*) indicate the factory default setting.
Table 2-12 Stapler/Stacker Settings menu
First level
Operation Mode
Stapling
Staples Very Low
Values
Mailbox
Stacker
Function Separator
None
Top left or right
Top left
Top right
Continue
Stop
Network Settings menu
To display: At the product control panel, select the Administration menu, and then select the Network
Settings menu.
In the following table, asterisks (*) indicate the factory default setting.
ENWW
Administration menu
39
Table 2-13 Network Settings menu
First level
I/O Timeout
Embedded Jetdirect Menu
EIO <X> Jetdirect Menu
Values
Range: 5 – 300 sec
Default = 15
See the table that follows for details. These menus have the same structure. If an additional HP Jetdirect network card is installed in the
EIO slot, then both menus are available.
Table 2-14 Embedded Jetdirect Menu / EIO <X> Jetdirect Menu
First level Second level Third level Fourth level
Information Print Sec Page
TCP/IP Enable
Host Name
IPV4 Settings Config Method
Values
Yes
No *
On *
Off
Bootp
DHCP *
Auto IP
Manual
Enter the address.
Manual Settings
NOTE:
This menu is available only if you select the Manual option under the Config Method menu.
Default IP
IP Address
Subnet Mask
Default Gateway
DHCP Release
DHCP Renew
Primary DNS
Secondary DNS
Yes
No *
Yes
Enter the address.
Enter the address.
Auto IP *
Legacy
No *
40 Chapter 2 Control panel menus ENWW
Table 2-14 Embedded Jetdirect Menu / EIO <X> Jetdirect Menu (continued)
First level Second level Third level Fourth level
IPV6 Settings Enable
Address
DHCPV6 Policy
Manual Settings
Security
Diagnostics
Secure Web
IPSEC
802.1X
Reset Security
Embedded Tests
Primary DNS
Secondary DNS
LAN HW Test
HTTP Test
SNMP Test
Data Path Test
Select All Tests
Execution Time [M]
Values
No *
Yes
No *
Yes
Disable *
Reset
Keep *
Yes
No *
Yes
Off
On *
Enable
Address
Router Specified
Router Unavailable *
Always
HTTPS Required *
HTTPS Optional
Keep
No *
Yes
No *
Yes
No *
Range: 1 – 60 hours
Default = 1 hour
ENWW
Administration menu
41
Table 2-14 Embedded Jetdirect Menu / EIO <X> Jetdirect Menu (continued)
First level Second level Third level Fourth level
Execute
Link Speed
Values
No *
Yes
Auto *
10T Half
10T Full
100TX Half
100TX Full
Troubleshooting menu
To display: At the product control panel, select the Administration menu, and then select the
Troubleshooting menu.
In the following table, asterisks (*) indicate the factory default setting.
Table 2-15 Troubleshooting menu
First level Second level Third level Fourth level Values
Event Log
Paper Path Page
Fax Fax T.30 Trace
Fax V.34
Print T.30 Report When to Print Report
View *
View *
Never automatically print *
Print after every fax
Print only after fax send jobs
Print after any fax error
Print only after fax send errors
Print only after fax receive errors
Save
Normal *
Off
42 Chapter 2 Control panel menus ENWW
Print Quality Pages
Diagnostic Tests
Table 2-15 Troubleshooting menu (continued)
First level Second level
Fax Speaker Mode
Third level
PQ Troubleshooting
Pages
Diagnostic Page
Color Band Test Print Test Page
Disable Cartridge Check
Copies
Paper Path Sensors
Paper Path Test
Select from a list of the product sensors.
Test Page
Source
Destination
Duplex
Copies
Fourth level
Manual Sensor Test
Tray/Bin Manual Sensor
Test
Component Test
Print/Stop Test
Scanner Tests
Stacking
Values
Normal *
Diagnostic
Range: 1 – 30
10
50
100
Select from a list of the available trays.
Select from a list of the available bins.
Off *
On
1 *
500
Off
On
Select from a list of available components.
Select from a list of available components.
Select from a list of available components.
Select from a list of available components.
ENWW
Administration menu
43
Table 2-15 Troubleshooting menu (continued)
First level Second level Third level
Control Panel
Retrieve Diagnostic Data
Fourth level Values
LEDs
Display
Buttons
Touchscreen
Create device data file
Create zipped debug information file
Include crash dump files
Clean up debug information
Send to E-mail
Export to USB
44 Chapter 2 Control panel menus ENWW
Device Maintenance menu
Backup/Restore menu
To display: At the product control panel, select the Device Maintenance menu, and then select the
Backup/Restore menu.
In the following table, asterisks (*) indicate the factory default setting.
Table 2-16 Backup/Restore menu
First level Second level
Backup Data
Restore Data
Enable Scheduled Backups
Backup Now
Export Last Backup
Third level
Backup Time
Days Between Backups
Values
Enter a time
Enter the number of days
Insert a USB drive that contains the backup file.
Calibration/Cleaning menu
To display: At the product control panel, select the Device Maintenance menu, and then select the
Calibration/Cleaning menu.
In the following table, asterisks (*) indicate the factory default setting.
Table 2-17 Calibration/Cleaning menu
First level Second level
Cleaning Settings Auto Cleaning
Cleaning Page
Quick Calibration
Full Calibration
Delay Calibration at Wake/Power On
Calibrate Scanner
Cleaning Interval
Cleaning Size
Values
Off *
On
Yes *
No
ENWW
Device Maintenance menu
45
USB Firmware Upgrade menu
To display: At the product control panel, select the Device Maintenance menu, and then select the
USB Firmware Upgrade menu.
Insert a USB storage device with a firmware upgrade bundle into the USB port, and follow the onscreen instructions.
Service menu
To display: At the product control panel, select the Device Maintenance menu, and then select the
Service menu.
The Service menu is locked and requires a PIN for access. This menu is intended for use by authorized service personnel.
46 Chapter 2 Control panel menus ENWW
3 Software for Windows
●
Supported operating systems for Windows
●
Supported printer drivers for Windows
●
Select the correct printer driver for Windows
●
●
Change printer-driver settings for Windows
●
●
Supported utilities for Windows
●
Software for other operating systems
ENWW 47
Supported operating systems for Windows
The product supports the following Windows operating systems:
●
Windows XP (32-bit and 64-bit)
●
Windows Server 2003 (32-bit and 64-bit)
●
Windows Server 2008 (32-bit and 64-bit)
●
Windows Vista (32-bit and 64-bit)
●
Windows 7 (32-bit and 64-bit)
48 Chapter 3 Software for Windows ENWW
Supported printer drivers for Windows
●
HP PCL 6 (this is the default printer driver)
●
HP postscript emulation Universal Print Driver (HP UPD PS)
●
HP PCL 5 Universal Print Driver (HP UPD PCL 5)
●
HP PCL 6 Universal Print Driver (HP UPD PCL 6)
The printer drivers include online Help that has instructions for common printing tasks and also describes the buttons, checkboxes, and drop-down lists that are in the printer driver.
NOTE:
For more information about the UPD, see www.hp.com/go/upd .
ENWW
Supported printer drivers for Windows
49
Select the correct printer driver for Windows
Printer drivers provide access to the product features and allow the computer to communicate with the product (using a printer language). The following printer drivers are available at www.hp.com/go/ cljcm4540mfp_software .
HP PCL 6 driver
HP UPD PS driver
HP UPD PCL 5
HP UPD PCL 6
●
Provided as the default driver. This driver is automatically installed unless you select a different one.
●
Recommended for all Windows environments
●
Provides the overall best speed, print quality, and product-feature support for most users
●
Developed to align with the Windows Graphic Device Interface (GDI) for the best speed in Windows environments
●
Might not be fully compatible with third-party and custom software programs that are based on PCL 5
● Recommended for printing with Adobe ® software programs or with other highly graphics-intensive software programs
●
Provides support for printing from postscript emulation needs, or for postscript flash font support
●
Recommended for general office printing in Windows environments
●
Compatible with previous PCL versions and older HP LaserJet products
●
The best choice for printing from third-party or custom software programs
●
The best choice when operating with mixed environments, which require the product to be set to PCL 5 (UNIX, Linux, mainframe)
●
Designed for use in corporate Windows environments to provide a single driver for use with multiple printer models
●
Preferred when printing to multiple printer models from a mobile Windows computer
●
Recommended for printing in all Windows environments
● Provides the overall best speed, print quality, and printer feature support for most users
●
Developed to align with Windows Graphic Device Interface (GDI) for best speed in Windows environments
●
May not be fully compatible with third-party and custom solutions based on
PCL5
50 Chapter 3 Software for Windows ENWW
HP Universal Print Driver (UPD)
The HP Universal Print Driver (UPD) for Windows is a single driver that gives you instant access to virtually any HP LaserJet product, from any location, without downloading separate drivers. It is built on proven HP print driver technology and has been tested thoroughly and used with many software programs. It is a powerful solution that performs consistently over time.
The HP UPD communicates directly with each HP product, gathers configuration information, and then customizes the user interface to show the product’s unique, available features. It automatically enables features that are available for the product, such as two-sided printing and stapling, so you do not need to enable them manually.
For more information, go to www.hp.com/go/upd .
UPD installation modes
Traditional mode
Dynamic mode
●
Use this mode if you are installing the driver from a CD for a single computer.
●
When installed from the CD that comes with the product, UPD operates like traditional printer drivers. It operates with a specific product.
●
If you use this mode, you must install UPD separately for each computer and for each product.
●
To use this mode, download UPD from the Internet. See www.hp.com/go/ upd .
●
Dynamic mode allows you to use a single driver installation, so you can discover and print to HP products in any location.
●
Use this mode if you are installing UPD for a workgroup.
ENWW
Select the correct printer driver for Windows
51
Priority for print settings
Changes to print settings are prioritized depending on where the changes are made:
NOTE:
The names of commands and dialog boxes might vary depending on your software program.
●
Page Setup dialog box: Click Page Setup or a similar command on the File menu of the program you are working in to open this dialog box. Settings changed here override settings changed anywhere else.
●
Print dialog box: Click Print, Print Setup, or a similar command on the File menu of the program you are working in to open this dialog box. Settings changed in the Print dialog box have a lower priority and usually do not override changes made in the Page Setup dialog box.
●
Printer Properties dialog box (printer driver): Click Properties in the Print dialog box to open the printer driver. Settings changed in the Printer Properties dialog box usually do not override settings anywhere else in the printing software. You can change most of the print settings here.
●
Default printer driver settings: The default printer driver settings determine the settings used in all print jobs, unless settings are changed in the Page Setup, Print, or Printer Properties dialog boxes.
●
Printer control panel settings: Settings changed at the printer control panel have a lower priority than changes made anywhere else.
52 Chapter 3 Software for Windows ENWW
Change printer-driver settings for Windows
Change the settings for all print jobs until the software program is closed
1.
On the File menu in the software program, click Print.
2.
Select the driver, and then click Properties or Preferences.
The steps can vary; this procedure is most common.
Change the default settings for all print jobs
1.
Windows XP, Windows Server 2003, and Windows Server 2008 (using the
default Start menu view): Click Start, and then click Printers and Faxes.
Windows XP, Windows Server 2003, and Windows Server 2008 (using the
Classic Start menu view): Click Start, click Settings, and then click Printers.
Windows Vista: Click Start, click Control Panel, and then in the category for Hardware
and Sound click Printer.
Windows 7: Click Start, and then click Devices and Printers.
2.
Right-click the driver icon, and then select Printing Preferences.
Change the product configuration settings
1.
Windows XP, Windows Server 2003, and Windows Server 2008 (using the
default Start menu view): Click Start, and then click Printers and Faxes.
Windows XP, Windows Server 2003, and Windows Server 2008 (using the
Classic Start menu view): Click Start, click Settings, and then click Printers.
Windows Vista: Click Start, click Control Panel, and then in the category for Hardware
and Sound click Printer.
Windows 7: Click Start, and then click Devices and Printers.
2.
Right-click the driver icon, and then select Properties or Printer properties.
3.
Click the Device Settings tab.
ENWW
Change printer-driver settings for Windows
53
Remove software for Windows
Windows XP
1.
Click Start, Control Panel, and then Add or Remove Programs.
2.
Find and select the product from the list.
3.
Click the Change/Remove button to remove the software.
Windows Vista
1.
Click Start, Control Panel, and then Programs and Features.
2.
Find and select the product from the list.
3.
Select the Uninstall/Change option.
Windows 7
1.
Click Start, Control Panel, and then under the Programs heading, click Uninstall a
program.
2.
Find and select the product from the list.
3.
Select the Uninstall option.
54 Chapter 3 Software for Windows ENWW
Supported utilities for Windows
HP Web Jetadmin
HP Web Jetadmin is a simple print and imaging peripheral management software tool that helps optimize product use, control color costs, secure products, and streamline supplies management by enabling remote configuration, proactive monitoring, security troubleshooting, and reporting of printing and imaging products.
To download a current version of HP Web Jetadmin and for the latest list of supported host systems, visit www.hp.com/go/webjetadmin .
When installed on a host server, a Windows client can gain access to HP Web Jetadmin by using a supported Web browser (such as Microsoft® Internet Explorer) by navigating to the HP Web Jetadmin host.
HP Embedded Web Server
The product is equipped with the HP Embedded Web Server, which provides access to information about product and network activities. This information appears in a Web browser, such as Microsoft
Internet Explorer, Netscape Navigator, Apple Safari, or Mozilla Firefox.
The HP Embedded Web Server resides on the product. It is not loaded on a network server.
The HP Embedded Web Server provides an interface to the product that anyone who has a networkconnected computer and a standard Web browser can use. No special software is installed or configured, but you must have a supported Web browser on your computer. To gain access to the
HP Embedded Web Server, type the IP address for the product in the address line of the browser. (To find the IP address, print a configuration page. For more information about printing a configuration
page, see Print information pages on page 264 ).
For a complete explanation of the features and functionality of the HP Embedded Web Server, see
Use the HP Embedded Web Server on page 266
.
ENWW
Supported utilities for Windows
55
Software for other operating systems
OS
UNIX
Linux
SAP devices
Software
For HP-UX and Solaris networks, go to www.hp.com/go/jetdirectunix_software to install model scripts using the HP Jetdirect printer installer (HPPI) for UNIX.
For the latest model scripts, go to www.hp.com/go/unixmodelscripts .
For information, go to www.hplip.net
.
For drivers, go to www.hp.com/go/sap/drivers
For information, go to www.hp.com/go/sap/print
56 Chapter 3 Software for Windows ENWW
4 Use the product with Mac
●
●
●
ENWW 57
Software for Mac
Supported operating systems for Mac
The product supports the following Mac operating systems:
●
Mac OS X 10.4, 10.5, 10.6, and later
NOTE:
For Mac OS X 10.4 and later, PPC and Intel® Core™ Processor Macs are supported.
Supported printer drivers for Mac
The HP LaserJet software installer provides PostScript
®
Printer Description (PPD) files, Printer Dialog
Extensions (PDEs), and the HP Utility for use with Mac OS X computers. The HP printer PPD and PDE files, in combination with the built-in Apple PostScript printer drivers, provide full printing functionality and access to specific HP printer features.
Install software for Mac operating systems
Install software for Mac computers connected directly to the product
This product supports a USB 2.0 connection. Use an A-to-B type USB cable. HP recommends using a cable that is no longer than 2 m (6.5 ft).
1.
Install the software from the CD.
2.
Click the product icon, and follow the onscreen instructions.
3.
Click the Close button.
4.
When the software prompts you, connect the USB cable to the product and the computer.
58
5.
To configure the product software to recognize the installed accessories, complete these steps:
Chapter 4 Use the product with Mac ENWW
Mac OS X 10.4
Mac OS X 10.5 and 10.6
1. From the Apple menu , click the System Preferences menu and then click the Print & Fax icon.
2. Click the Printer Setup button.
3. Click the Installable Options menu.
4. Configure the installed options.
1. From the Apple menu , click the System Preferences menu and then click the Print & Fax icon.
2. Select the product in the left side of the window.
3. Click the Options & Supplies button.
4. Click the Driver tab.
5. Configure the installed options.
NOTE:
For Mac OS X 10.5 and 10.6, the installation procedure should automatically configure the installed options.
6.
Print a page from any program to make sure that the software is correctly installed.
NOTE:
If the installation failed, reinstall the software.
Install software for Mac computers on a wired network
Configure the IP address
1.
Make sure the product is turned on and that the Ready message appears on the control-panel display.
2.
Connect the network cable to the product and to the network.
ENWW
3.
Wait for 60 seconds before continuing. During this time, the network recognizes the product and assigns an IP address or host name for the product.
4.
At the product control panel, touch the Network Address button to identify the product IP address or host name.
Software for Mac
59
If the Network Address button is not visible, you can find the IP address or host name by printing a configuration page.
a. At the product control panel, scroll to and touch the
Administration button.
b. Open the following menus:
●
Reports
●
Configuration/Status Pages
●
Configuration Page
c.
Touch the View button to view the information on the control panel, or touch the Print button to print the pages.
d. Find the IP address on the Jetdirect page.
60
5.
IPv4: If the IP address is 0.0.0.0, or 192.0.0.192, or 169.254.x.x, you must manually configure the IP address. Otherwise, the network configuration was successful.
IPv6: If the IP address begins with "fe80:", the product should be able to print. If not, you must manually configure the IP address.
Install the software
1.
Quit all programs on the computer.
2.
Install the software from the CD.
3.
Click the product icon, and follow the onscreen instructions.
4.
Click the Close button when the installation is complete.
5.
At the computer, open the Apple menu , click the System Preferences menu, and then click the Print & Fax icon.
6.
Click the plus symbol (+).
Chapter 4 Use the product with Mac ENWW
By default, Mac OS X uses the Bonjour method to find the driver and add the product to the printer pop-up menu. This method is best in most situations. If Mac OS X cannot find the HP printer driver, an error message displays. Reinstall the software.
If you are connecting the product to a large network, you might need to use IP printing to connect rather than Bonjour. Follow these steps:
a. Click the IP Printer button.
b. From the Protocol drop-down list, select the HP Jetdirect-Socket option. Enter the IP address or host name for the product. From the Print Using drop-down list, select the product model if one is not already selected.
7.
To configure the product to recognize the installed accessories, complete these steps:
Mac OS X 10.4
Mac OS X 10.5 and 10.6
1. From the Apple menu , click the System Preferences menu and then click the Print & Fax icon.
2. Click the Printer Setup button.
3. Click the Installable Options menu.
4. Configure the installed options.
1. From the Apple menu , click the System Preferences menu and then click the Print & Fax icon.
2. Select the product in the left side of the window.
3. Click the Options & Supplies button.
4. Click the Driver tab.
5. Configure the installed options.
NOTE:
For Mac OS X 10.5 and 10.6, the installation procedure should automatically configure the installed options.
8.
Print a page from any program to make sure that the software is correctly installed.
Remove software from Mac operating systems
You must have administrator rights to remove the software.
1.
Open System Preferences.
2.
Select Print & Fax.
3.
Highlight the product.
4.
Click the minus (-) symbol.
ENWW
Software for Mac
61
5.
Delete the print queue, if necessary.
6.
Delete the .GZ file from the following hard-drive folder:
●
Mac OS X 10.4: Library/Printers/PPDs/Contents/Resources/
<lang>.lproj
, where <lang> is the two-letter language code for the language that you are using.
●
Mac OS X 10.5 and 10.6: Library/Printers/PPDs/Contents/Resources
62 Chapter 4 Use the product with Mac ENWW
Priority for print settings for Mac
Changes to print settings are prioritized depending on where the changes are made:
NOTE:
The names of commands and dialog boxes might vary depending on your software program.
●
Page Setup dialog box: Click Page Setup or a similar command on the File menu of the program you are working in to open this dialog box. Settings changed here might override settings changed anywhere else.
●
Print dialog box: Click Print, Print Setup, or a similar command on the File menu of the program you are working in to open this dialog box. Settings changed in the Print dialog box have a lower priority and do not override changes made in the Page Setup dialog box.
●
Default printer driver settings: The default printer driver settings determine the settings used in all print jobs, unless settings are changed in the Page Setup, Print, or Printer Properties dialog boxes.
●
Printer control panel settings: Settings changed at the printer control panel have a lower priority than changes made anywhere else.
Change printer-driver settings for Mac
Change the settings for all print jobs until the software program is closed
1.
On the File menu, click the Print button.
2.
Change the settings that you want on the various menus.
Change the default settings for all print jobs
1.
2.
On the File menu, click the Print button.
Change the settings that you want on the various menus.
3.
On the Presets menu, click the
Save As... option and type a name for the preset.
These settings are saved in the Presets menu. To use the new settings, you must select the saved preset option every time you open a program and print.
Change the product configuration settings
Mac OS X 10.4
1.
From the Apple menu , click the
System Preferences menu and then click the Print & Fax icon.
2.
Click the Printer Setup button.
3.
Click the Installable Options menu.
4.
Configure the installed options.
Mac OS X 10.5 and 10.6
1.
From the Apple menu , click the
System Preferences menu and then click the Print & Fax icon.
2.
Select the product in the left side of the window.
3.
Click the Options & Supplies button.
4.
Click the Driver tab.
5.
Configure the installed options.
ENWW
Software for Mac
63
Software for Mac computers
HP Utility for Mac
Use the HP Utility to set up product features that are not available in the printer driver.
You can use the HP Utility when the product uses a universal serial bus (USB) cable or is connected to a
TCP/IP-based network.
Open the HP Printer Utility
Mac OS X 10.4
Mac OS X 10.5 and 10.6
1.
Open the Finder, click Applications, click Utilities, and then double-click
Printer Setup Utility.
2.
Select the product that you want to configure, and then click Utility.
1.
From the Printer Browser menu, click Printer Utility.
-or-
From the Print Queue, click the Utility icon.
HP Utility features
The HP Utility consists of pages that you open by clicking in the Configuration Settings list. The following table describes the tasks that you can perform from these pages. At the top of any page, click the HP Support link to access technical assistance, online supplies ordering, online registration, and recycling and return information.
Menu
Information And
Support
Printer Settings
Item
Supplies Status
Device Information
Color Usage
File Upload
Upload Fonts
Update Firmware
Commands
Trays Configuration
Duplex Mode
Stored Jobs
E-mail Alerts
Network Settings
Description
Shows the product supplies status and provides links for online supplies-ordering.
Shows information about the currently selected product.
Shows the total pages printed, the number of pages printed in color, and the number of pages printed in black only.
Transfers files from the computer to the product.
Transfers font files from the computer to the product.
Transfers a firmware update file to the product.
Sends special characters or print commands to the product after the print job.
Changes the default tray settings.
Turns on the automatic two-sided printing mode.
Manages print jobs that are stored on the product hard disk.
Configures the product to send e-mail notices for certain events.
Configures the network settings, such as the IPv4 and IPv6 settings.
64 Chapter 4 Use the product with Mac ENWW
Menu Item
Supplies
Management
Restrict Color
Protect Direct Ports
Additional Settings
Description
Configures how the product should behave when supplies are nearing the end of their estimated life.
Configures color-printing restrictions for specific users and software programs.
NOTE:
This option is available only after you open the View menu and select the Show Advanced option.
Disables printing over USB or parallel ports.
Provides access to the HP Embedded Web Server.
Supported utilities for Mac
HP Embedded Web Server
The product is equipped with the HP Embedded Web server, which provides access to information about product and network activities. Access the HP Embedded Web Server from the HP Utility. Open the Printer Settings menu, and then select the Additional Settings option.
ENWW
Software for Mac
65
Print with Mac
Cancel a print job with Mac
1.
If the print job is currently printing, cancel it by following this procedure:
a. Press the Stop button on the product control panel.
b. From the list on the touchscreen, touch the print job you want to delete, and touch the
Cancel
Job button.
c.
The product prompts you to confirm the deletion. Touch the Yes button.
2.
You can also cancel a print job from a software program or a print queue.
●
Software program: Typically, a dialog box appears briefly on the computer screen, allowing you to cancel the print job.
●
Mac print queue: Open the print queue by double-clicking the product icon in the Dock.
Highlight the print job, and then click Delete.
Change the paper size and type with Mac
1.
On the File menu in the software program, click the Print option.
2.
In the Copies & Pages menu, click the Page Setup button.
3.
Select a size from the Paper Size drop-down list, and then click the OK button.
4.
Open the Finishing menu. (Mac OS X 10.5 and 10.6)
5.
Select a type from the Media-type drop-down list.
6.
Click the Print button.
Create and use printing presets with Mac
Use printing presets to save the current printer driver settings for reuse.
Create a printing preset
1.
On the File menu, click the Print option.
2.
Select the driver.
3.
Select the print settings that you want to save for reuse.
4.
In the Presets menu, click the Save As... option, and type a name for the preset.
5.
Click the OK button.
66 Chapter 4 Use the product with Mac ENWW
Use printing presets
1.
On the File menu, click the Print option.
2.
Select the driver.
3.
In the Presets menu, select the printing preset.
NOTE:
To use printer-driver default settings, select the standard option.
Resize documents or print on a custom paper size with Mac
Mac OS X 10.4, 10.5, and 10.6
Mac OS X 10.5 and 10.6
Use one of these methods.
1.
On the File menu, click the Page Setup option.
2.
Select the product, and then select the correct settings for the Paper Size and
Orientation options.
1.
On the File menu, click the Print option.
2.
Click the Page Setup button.
3.
Select the product, and then select the correct settings for the Paper Size and
Orientation options.
1.
On the File menu, click the Print option.
2.
Open the Paper Handling menu.
3.
In the Destination Paper Size area, click the Scale to fit paper size box, and then select the size from the drop-down list.
Print a cover page with Mac
1.
On the File menu, click the Print option.
2.
Select the driver.
3.
Open the Cover Page menu, and then select where to print the cover page. Click either the
Before Document button or the After Document button.
4.
In the Cover Page Type menu, select the message that you want to print on the cover page.
NOTE:
To print a blank cover page, select the standard option from the Cover Page Type menu.
Use watermarks with Mac
1.
On the File menu, click the Print option.
2.
Open the Watermarks menu.
3.
From the Mode menu, select the type of watermark to use. Select the Watermark option to print a semi-transparent message. Select the Overlay option to print a message that is not transparent.
ENWW
Print with Mac
67
4.
From the Pages menu, select whether to print the watermark on all pages or on the first page only.
5.
From the Text menu, select one of the standard messages, or select the Custom option and type a new message in the box.
6.
Select options for the remaining settings.
Print multiple pages on one sheet of paper with Mac
1.
On the File menu, click the Print option.
2.
Select the driver.
3.
Open the Layout menu.
4.
From the Pages per Sheet menu, select the number of pages that you want to print on each sheet (1, 2, 4, 6, 9, or 16).
5.
In the Layout Direction area, select the order and placement of the pages on the sheet.
6.
From the Borders menu, select the type of border to print around each page on the sheet.
Print on both sides (duplex) with Mac
1.
Insert enough paper into one of the trays to accommodate the print job.
2.
On the File menu, click the Print option.
3.
Open the Layout menu.
4.
From the Two-Sided menu, select a binding option.
68 Chapter 4 Use the product with Mac ENWW
Store jobs with Mac
You can store jobs on the product so you can print them at any time. You can share stored jobs with other users, or you can make them private.
1.
On the File menu, click the Print option.
2.
Open the Job Storage menu.
3.
In the Job Storage Mode drop-down list, select the type of stored job.
●
Proof and Hold: This feature provides a quick way to print and proof one copy of a job and then print more copies.
●
Personal Job: When you send a job to the product, the job does not print until you request it at the product control panel. If you assign a personal identification number (PIN) to the job, you must provide the required PIN at the control panel.
●
Quick Copy: If the optional hard disk is installed on the product, you can print the requested number of copies of a job and then store a copy of the job on the optional hard disk. Storing the job allows you to print additional copies of the job later.
●
Stored Job: If the optional hard disk is installed on the product, you can store a job such as a personnel form, time sheet, or calendar on the product and allow other users to print the job at any time. Stored jobs also can be protected by a PIN.
4.
To use a custom user name or job name, click the Custom button, and then enter the user name or the job name.
Select which option to use if another stored job already has that name.
Use Job Name + (1 - 99)
Replace Existing File
Append a unique number to the end of the job name.
Overwrite the existing stored job with the new one.
5.
If you selected the Stored Job or Personal Job option in step 3, you can protect the job with a
PIN. Type a 4-digit number in the Use PIN to Print field. When other people attempt to print this job, the product prompts them to enter this PIN number.
Set the color options with Mac
Use the Color Options menu or the Color/Quality Options menu to control how colors are interpreted and printed from software programs.
1.
On the File menu, click the Print option.
2.
Select the driver.
3.
Open the Color Options menu or the Color/Quality Options menu.
4.
Select the appropriate tab and adjust the settings.
ENWW
Print with Mac
69
Solve problems with a Mac
See Solve product software problems with Mac on page 319
.
70 Chapter 4 Use the product with Mac ENWW
5 Connect the product
●
●
●
ENWW 71
Printer sharing disclaimer
HP does not support peer-to-peer networking, as the feature is a function of Microsoft operating systems and not of the HP printer drivers. Go to Microsoft at www.microsoft.com
.
72 Chapter 5 Connect the product ENWW
Connect with USB
This product supports a USB 2.0 connection. Use an A-to-B type USB cable. HP recommends using a cable that is no longer than 2 m (6.5 ft).
CAUTION:
Do not connect the USB cable until the installation software prompts you to connect it.
CD installation
1.
Quit all open programs on the computer.
2.
Install the software from the CD, and follow the onscreen instructions.
3.
When prompted, select the Directly connect to this computer using USB cable option, and then click the Next button.
4.
When the software prompts you, connect the USB cable to the product and the computer.
5.
At the end of the installation, click the Finish button, or click the More Options button to install more software.
6.
On the More Options screen, you can install more software, or click the Exit button.
7.
Print a page from any program to make sure that the software is correctly installed.
NOTE:
If the installation failed, reinstall the software.
Connect to a network
You can configure network parameters from the control panel, the HP Embedded Web Server, or for most networks, from the HP Web Jetadmin software.
NOTE:
HP Web Jetadmin software is not supported on Mac OS X operating systems.
ENWW
Connect with USB
73
For a complete list of supported networks and for instructions on configuring network parameters from software, see the HP Jetdirect Embedded Print Server Administrator’s Guide. The guide comes with products in which an HP Jetdirect embedded print server is installed.
Supported network protocols
Table 5-1 Supported network protocols
Network type Supported protocols
TCP/IP IPv4 and IPv6 networks
TCP/IP IPv4 networks only
●
Apple Bonjour
●
Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP) v1, v2, and v3
●
Hyper Text Transfer Protocol (HTTP)
●
Secure HTTP (HTTPS)
●
File Transfer Protocol (FTP)
●
Port 9100
●
Line printer daemon (LPD)
●
Intenet Printing Protocol (IPP)
●
Secure IPP
●
Web Services Dynamic Discovery (WS Discovery)
●
IPsec/Firewall
●
Auto IP
● Service Location Protocol (SLP)
●
Trivial File Transfer Protocol (TFTP)
●
Telnet
● Internet Group Management Protocol (IGMP) v2
●
Bootstrap Protocol (BOOTP)/DHCP
●
Windows Internet Name Service (WINS)
● IP Direct Mode
●
WS Print
74 Chapter 5 Connect the product ENWW
Table 5-1 Supported network protocols (continued)
Network type Supported protocols
TCP/IP IPv6 networks only
●
Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol (DHCP) v6
●
Multicast Listener Discovery Protocol (MLD) v1
●
Internet Control Message Protocol (ICMP) v6
Other supported network protocols
●
Internetwork Packet Exchange/Sequenced Packet Exchange (IPX/SPX)
● AppleTalk
● NetWare Directory Services (NDS)
●
Bindery
●
Novell Distributed Print Services (NDPS)
● iPrint
Table 5-2 Advanced Security features for network management
Service name Description
IPsec/Firewall
Kerberos
SNMP v3
SSL/TLS
IPsec batch configuration
Provides network-layer security on IPv4 and IPv6 networks. A firewall provides simple control of IP traffic. IPsec provides additional protection through authentication and encryption protocols.
Allows you to exchange private information across an open network by assigning a unique key, called a ticket, to each user who logs on to the network. The ticket is then embedded in messages to identify the sender.
Employs a user-based security model for SNMP v3, which provides user authentication and data privacy through encryption.
Allows you to transmit private documents via the Internet and guarantee privacy and data integrity between the client and server applications.
Provides network-layer security through the simple control of IP traffic to and from the product. This protocol provides the benefits of encryption and authentication and allows for multiple configurations.
Install the product on a wired network
Configure the IP address
1.
Make sure the product is turned on and that the Ready message appears on the control-panel display.
ENWW
Connect to a network
75
2.
Connect the network cable to the product and to the network.
3.
Wait for 60 seconds before continuing. During this time, the network recognizes the product and assigns an IP address or host name for the product.
4.
At the product control panel, touch the Network Address button to identify the product IP address or host name.
If the Network Address button is not visible, you can find the IP address or host name by printing a configuration page.
a. At the product control panel, scroll to and touch the Administration button.
b. Open the following menus:
●
Reports
●
Configuration/Status Pages
●
Configuration Page
c.
Touch the View button to view the information on the control panel, or touch the Print button to print the pages.
76 Chapter 5 Connect the product ENWW
d. Find the IP address on the Jetdirect page.
5.
IPv4: If the IP address is 0.0.0.0, or 192.0.0.192, or 169.254.x.x, you must manually configure the IP address. Otherwise, the network configuration was successful.
IPv6: If the IP address begins with "fe80:", the product should be able to print. If not, you must manually configure the IP address.
Install the software
1.
Quit all programs on the computer.
2.
Install the software from the CD.
3.
Follow the onscreen instructions.
4.
When prompted, select the Connect through a wired network option.
5.
From the list of available printers, select the printer that has the correct IP address.
6.
At the end of the installation, click the Finish button, or click the More Options button to install more software or configure basic digital sending features for the product.
●
Install the HP PC Send Fax driver to enable sending faxes from your computer. (Fax models only)
●
Use the HP Scan to Email Setup Wizard to configure basic E-mail settings.
●
Use the HP Save to Folder Setup Wizard to set up a shared folder on the network where you can store scanned documents.
7.
Print a page from any program to make sure that the software is correctly installed.
ENWW
Connect to a network
77
Configure network settings
View or change network settings
Use the embedded Web server to view or change IP configuration settings.
1.
Print a configuration page, and locate the IP address.
●
If you are using IPv4, the IP address contains only digits. It has this format: xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx
●
If you are using IPv6, the IP address is a hexadecimal combination of characters and digits. It has a format similar to this: xxxx::xxxx:xxxx:xxxx:xxxx
2.
To open the embedded Web server, type the IP address into the address line of a Web browser.
3.
Click the Networking tab to obtain network information. You can change settings as needed.
Set or change the network password
Use the embedded Web server to set a network password or change an existing password.
1.
Open the embedded Web server, click the Networking tab, and click the Security link.
NOTE:
If a password has previously been set, you are prompted to type the password. Type the password, and then click the Apply button.
2.
Type the new password in the New Password box and in the Verify password box.
3.
At the bottom of the window, click the Apply button to save the password.
78 Chapter 5 Connect the product ENWW
Manually configure IPv4 TCP/IP parameters from the control panel
Use the control-panel Administration menus to manually set an IPv4 address, subnet mask, and default gateway.
1.
From the Home screen, scroll to and touch the Administration button.
2.
Open each of the following menus:
a.
Network Settings
b.
Embedded Jetdirect Menu
c.
TCP/IP
d.
IPV4 Settings
e.
Config Method
f.
Manual
g.
Manual Settings
h.
IP Address , Subnet Mask , or Default Gateway
3.
Use the keypad to specify the IP address, subnet mask, or default gateway.
ENWW
Connect to a network
79
Manually configure IPv6 TCP/IP parameters from the control panel
Use the control-panel Administration menus to manually set an IPv6 address.
1.
From the Home screen, scroll to and touch the Administration button.
2.
To enable manual configuration, open each of the following menus:
a.
Network Settings
b.
Embedded Jetdirect Menu
c.
TCP/IP
d.
IPV6 Settings
e.
Address
f.
Manual Settings
g.
Enable
Select the On option, and then touch the Save button.
3.
To configure the address, open each of the following menus:
●
Network Settings
●
Embedded Jetdirect Menu
●
TCP/IP
●
IPV6 Settings
●
Address
Use the keypad to enter the address.
NOTE:
If you are using the arrow buttons, you must press the OK button after entering each digit.
80 Chapter 5 Connect the product ENWW
6 Paper and print media
●
●
Change the printer driver to match the paper type and size in Windows
●
●
●
●
●
Select an output bin (fskm models only)
ENWW 81
Understand paper use
This product supports a variety of paper and other print media in accordance with the guidelines in this user guide. Paper or print media that does not meet these guidelines might cause poor print quality, increased jams, and premature wear on the product.
For best results, use only HP-brand paper and print media designed for laser printers or multiuse. Do not use paper or print media made for inkjet printers. Hewlett-Packard Company cannot recommend the use of other brands of media because HP cannot control their quality.
It is possible for paper to meet all of the guidelines in this user guide and still not produce satisfactory results. This might be the result of improper handling, unacceptable temperature and/or humidity levels, or other variables over which Hewlett-Packard has no control.
CAUTION:
Using paper or print media that does not meet Hewlett-Packard's specifications might cause problems for the product, requiring repair. This repair is not covered by the Hewlett-Packard warranty or service agreements.
Special paper guidelines
This product supports printing on special media. Use the following guidelines to obtain satisfactory results. When using special paper or print media, be sure to set the type and size in the printer driver to obtain the best results.
CAUTION:
HP LaserJet products use fusers to bond dry toner particles to the paper in very precise dots. HP laser paper is designed to withstand this extreme heat. Using inkjet paper could damage the product.
Media type
Envelopes
Labels
Transparencies
Do Do not
●
Store envelopes flat.
●
Use envelopes where the seam extends all the way to the corner of the envelope.
●
Use peel-off adhesive strips that are approved for use in laser printers.
●
Do not use envelopes that are wrinkled, nicked, stuck together, or otherwise damaged.
●
Do not use envelopes that have clasps, snaps, windows, or coated linings.
●
Do not use self-stick adhesives or other synthetic materials.
●
Use only labels that have no exposed backing between them.
●
Use labels that lie flat.
●
Do not use labels that have wrinkles or bubbles, or are damaged.
●
Do not print partial sheets of labels.
●
Use only full sheets of labels.
●
Use only transparencies that are approved for use in color laser printers.
●
Place transparencies on a flat surface after removing them from the product.
●
Do not use transparent print media not approved for laser printers.
82 Chapter 6 Paper and print media ENWW
Media type
Letterhead or preprinted forms
Heavy paper
Glossy or coated paper
Do Do not
●
Use only letterhead or forms approved for use in laser printers.
●
Use only heavy paper that is approved for use in laser printers and meets the weight specifications for this product.
●
Use only glossy or coated paper that is approved for use in laser printers.
●
Do not use raised or metallic letterhead.
●
Do not use paper that is heavier than the recommended media specification for this product unless it is HP paper that has been approved for use in this product.
●
Do not use glossy or coated paper designed for use in inkjet products.
ENWW
Understand paper use
83
Change the printer driver to match the paper type and size in Windows
1.
On the File menu in the software program, click Print.
2.
Select the product, and then click the Properties or Preferences button.
3.
Click the Paper/Quality tab.
4.
Select a size from the Paper size drop-down list.
5.
Select a paper type from the Paper type drop-down list.
6.
Click the OK button.
84 Chapter 6 Paper and print media ENWW
Supported paper sizes
NOTE:
To obtain best results, select the correct paper size and type in the printer driver before printing.
Table 6-1 Supported paper and print media sizes
Size and dimensions Tray 1 Tray 2 Optional Trays
3, 4, and 5
Automatic duplex printing
Letter
216 x 279 mm (8.5 x 11 in)
Legal
216 x 356 mm (8.5 x 14 in)
Executive
184 x 267 mm (7.24 x 10.51 in)
Statement
140 x 216 mm (5.5 x 8.5 in)
8.5 x 13
216 x 330 mm (8.5 x 13 in)
4 x 6
101.6 x 152.4 mm (4 x 6 in)
10 x 15 cm
101.6 x 152.4 mm (4 x 6 in)
5 x 7
127 x 188 mm (5 x 7 in)
5 x 8
127 x 203 mm (5 x 8 in)
A4
210 x 297 mm (8.27 x 11.69 in)
RA4
215 x 305 mm (8.46 x 12.01 in)
A5
148 x 210 mm (5.83 x 8.27 in)
A6
105 x 148 mm (4.13 x 5.82 in)
ENWW
Supported paper sizes
85
Table 6-1 Supported paper and print media sizes (continued)
Size and dimensions Tray 1 Tray 2
B5 (JIS)
182 x 257 mm (7.17 x 10.12 in)
B6 (JIS)
128 x 182 mm (5.03 x 7.16 in)
16K
195 x 270 mm (7.67 x 10.62 in)
184 x 260 mm (7.24 x 10.23 in)
197 x 273 mm (7.75 x 10.74 in)
Postcard (JIS)
100 x 148 mm (3.93 x 5.82 in)
DPostcard (JIS)
148 x 200 mm (5.82 x 7.87 in)
Custom
89 x 127 mm to 216 x 356 mm (3.5 x 5 in to
8.5 x 14 in)
Custom
148 x 210 mm to 216 x 356 mm (5.83 x 8.27 in to 8.5 x 14 in)
Envelope #9
98 x 225 mm (3.85 x 8.85 in)
Envelope #10
105 x 241 mm (4.13 x 9.48 in)
Envelope Monarch
98 x 191 mm (3.9 x 7.5 in)
Envelope B5
176 x 250 mm (6.92 x 9.84 in)
Envelope C5
162 x 229 mm (6.37 x 9.01 in)
Envelope C6
162 x 114 mm (6.37 x 4.48 in)
Optional Trays
3, 4, and 5
Automatic duplex printing
86 Chapter 6 Paper and print media ENWW
Table 6-1 Supported paper and print media sizes (continued)
Size and dimensions Tray 1 Tray 2 Optional Trays
3, 4, and 5
Automatic duplex printing
Envelope DL ISO
110 x 220 mm (4.33 x 8.66 in)
1 The product can print on 89 x 127 mm (3.5 x 5 in) size paper from Tray 1 for Extra Heavy (131-175 g/m
(176-220 g/m 2 ) paper types.
2 ) and Cardstock
ENWW
Supported paper sizes
87
Supported paper types
Paper type Tray 1
Plain Paper
HP Matte (105 g/m
2
)
HP Matte (120 g/m
2
)
HP Matte (160 g/m 2 )
HP Matte (200 g/m 2 )
HP Soft Gloss (120 g/m 2 )
HP Glossy (130 g/m 2 )
HP Glossy (160 g/m 2 )
HP Glossy (220 g/m 2 )
Light (60–74 g/m 2 )
Midweight (96–110 g/m 2 )
Heavy (111–130 g/m 2 )
Extra Heavy (131–175 g/m
2
)
Cardstock (176–220 gm
2
)
Mid-weight glossy (96–110 g/m
2
)
Heavy glossy (111–130 g/m
2
)
Extra-heavy glossy (131–175 g/m
2
)
Card glossy (176–220 g/m
2
)
Color Transparency
Labels
Letterhead
Envelope
Preprinted
Prepunched
Colored
Bond
Recycled
Rough
HP Tough Paper
Tray 2
88 Chapter 6 Paper and print media
Optional Trays 3,
4, and 5
Automatic duplex printing
ENWW
Paper type Tray 1 Tray 2 Optional Trays 3,
4, and 5
Automatic duplex printing
Opaque film
1
2
Trays 2, 3, 4, and 5 can print on this paper in some circumstances, but HP does not guarantee results.
The product can automatically print on both sides for this paper type in some circumstances, but HP does not guarantee results.
ENWW
Supported paper types
89
Load paper trays
Load Tray 1
CAUTION:
To avoid jams, never add or remove paper from Tray 1 during printing.
1.
Open Tray 1.
2.
Fold out the tray extension to support the paper and set the side guides to the correct width.
90 Chapter 6 Paper and print media ENWW
3.
Load paper in the tray.
4.
Make sure the stack fits under the tabs on the guides and does not exceed the load-level indicators.
5.
Adjust the side guides so that they lightly touch the paper stack but do not bend it.
ENWW
Load paper trays
91
Load Tray 2 and optional Trays 3, 4, and 5 with standard-size paper
1.
Open the tray.
NOTE:
Do not open the tray while it is in use.
2.
Adjust the paper-length and paper-width guides by squeezing the adjustment latches and sliding the guides to the size of the paper being used.
3.
Load paper into the tray. Check the paper to verify the guides lightly touch the stack, but do not bend it.
NOTE:
To prevent jams, do not overfill the tray. Be sure the top of the stack is below the tray full indicator.
NOTE:
If the tray is not adjusted correctly, an error message might appear during printing or the paper might jam.
92 Chapter 6 Paper and print media ENWW
4.
Close the tray.
5.
The control panel shows the tray’s paper type and size. If the configuration is not correct, follow the instructions on the control panel to change the size or type.
Load Tray 2 and optional Trays 3, 4, and 5 with custom-size paper
1.
Open the tray.
ENWW
Load paper trays
93
2.
Adjust the paper-length and paper-width guides by squeezing the adjustment latches and sliding the guides to the size of the paper being used.
3.
Load paper into the tray. Check the paper to verify the guides lightly touch the stack, but do not bend it.
94 Chapter 6 Paper and print media ENWW
4.
Close the tray.
5.
The control panel prompts you to set the paper size and type. Select the Custom setting, and then configure the X and Y dimensions of the custom paper size.
NOTE:
See the label in the paper tray, or the following illustration, to determine the X and Y dimensions.
Y
X
ENWW
Load paper trays
95
Tray and bin capacity
Tray or bin
Tray 1
Paper type
Paper
Envelopes
Labels
Transparencies
Glossy paper
Paper Tray 2
Transparencies
Glossy paper
Optional Trays 3, 4, and 5 Paper
Output bin
Document feeder
Transparencies
Glossy paper
Paper
Paper
96 Chapter 6 Paper and print media
Specifications Quantity
Range:
60 g/m m 2
2 (16 lb) bond to 216 g/
(58 lb) bond
Maximum stack height: 10 mm
(0.39 in)
Equivalent to 100 sheets of
75 g/m 2 (20 lb) bond
Less than 60 g/m 2 (16 lb) bond to 90 g/m 2 (24 lb) bond
Up to 10 envelopes
Maximum 0.102 mm (0.004 in) thick
Minimum 0.102 mm (0.004 in) thick
Maximum stack height: 10 mm
(0.39 in)
Maximum stack height: 10 mm
(0.39 in)
Range:
Up to 50 sheets
Maximum stack height: 10 mm
(0.39 in)
105 g/m 2 (28 lb) bond to 220 g/m 2 (58 lb) bond
Up to 50 sheets
Range:
60 g/m 2 (16 lb) bond to 220 g/ m
2
(59 lb) bond
Maximum stack height: 56 mm
(2.2 in)
Equivalent to 500 sheets of
75 g/m 2 (20 lb) bond
Minimum 0.102 mm (0.004 in) thick
Range:
Maximum stack height: 56 mm
(2.2 in)
Maximum stack height: 56 mm
(2.2 in)
105 g/m 2 (28 lb) bond to
220 g/m
2
(58 lb) bond
Range:
60 g/m
2
(16 lb) bond to 220 g/ m 2 (59 lb) bond
Maximum stack height: 56 mm
(2.2 in)
Equivalent to 500 sheets of
75 g/m
2
(20 lb) bond
Minimum 0.102 mm (0.004 in) thick
Range:
Maximum stack height: 56 mm
(2.2 in)
Maximum stack height: 56 mm
(2.2 in)
105 g/m 2 (28 lb) bond to
220 g/m
2
(58 lb) bond
Up to 500 sheets of 75 g/m
2
(20 lb) bond
Range:
60 g/m 2 (16 lb) bond to 220 g/ m
2
(59 lb) bond
Up to 50 sheets of 75 g/m 2
(20 lb) bond
ENWW
NOTE:
Trays 2, 3, 4, and 5 can print on bond paper heavier than 220 g/m
2
(59 lb) in some circumstances, but HP does not guarantee results.
ENWW
Load paper trays
97
Paper orientation for loading trays
If you are using paper that requires a specific orientation, load it according to the information in the following tables.
NOTE:
The Alternative Letterhead Mode and Image Rotation settings affect the way you load letterhead or preprinted paper. The following information depicts the default setting.
Paper orientation for loading Tray 1
Paper type
Preprinted or letterhead
Image orientation
Portrait
Duplex mode
1-sided printing
How to load paper
Face down
Bottom edge leading into the product
Automatic 2-sided printing Face up
Bottom edge leading into the product
Landscape 1-sided printing Face down
Top edge toward the back of the product
Automatic 2-sided printing Face up
Top edge toward the back of the product
98 Chapter 6 Paper and print media ENWW
Paper type
Prepunched
Image orientation
Portrait or landscape
Duplex mode
1- or 2-sided printing
How to load paper
Holes toward the back of the product
Envelopes Landscape
Short edge of the envelope feeding into the product
1-sided printing Face down
Top edge toward the front of the product
Portrait
Long edge of the envelope feeding into the product
1-sided printing Face down
Top edge leading into the product
ENWW
Load paper trays
99
Paper orientation for loading Tray 2 or Trays 3, 4, and 5
Paper type
Preprinted or letterhead
Image orientation
Portrait
Duplex mode
1-sided printing
How to load paper
Face up
Top edge at the left side of the tray
Automatic 2-sided printing Face down
Top edge at the left side of the tray
Landscape 1-sided printing Face up
Top edge toward the back of the product
Automatic 2-sided printing Face down
Top edge toward the back of the product
Prepunched Portrait or landscape 1- or 2-sided printing Holes toward the back of the product
100 Chapter 6 Paper and print media ENWW
Configure trays
The product automatically prompts you to configure a tray for type and size in the following situations:
●
When you load paper into the tray
●
When you specify a particular tray or paper type for a print job through the printer driver or a software program and the tray is not configured to match the print-job’s settings
NOTE:
The prompt does not appear if you are printing from Tray 1, and it is configured for the Any
Size paper size and the Any Type paper type settings. In this situation, if the print job does not specify a tray, the product prints from Tray 1, even if the paper size and type settings in the print job do not match the paper loaded in Tray 1.
Configure a tray when loading paper
1.
Load paper in the tray. Close the tray if you are using Tray 2, 3, 4, or 5.
2.
The tray configuration message appears.
3.
Touch the OK button to accept the detected size and type, or touch the Modify button to choose a different paper size or type.
4.
Select the correct size and type and then touch the OK button.
Configure a tray to match print job settings
1.
In the software program, specify the source tray, the paper size, and the paper type.
2.
Send the job to the product.
If the tray needs to be configured, the tray configuration message appears.
3.
Load the tray with the specified type and size of paper, and then close the tray.
4.
Touch the OK button to accept the detected size and type, or touch the Modify button to choose a different paper size or type.
5.
Select the correct size and type and then touch the OK button.
Configure a tray by using the control panel
You can also configure the trays for type and size without a prompt from the product.
1.
From the Home screen, touch the Trays button.
2.
Touch the line for the tray that you want to configure, and then touch the Modify button.
3.
Select the paper size and paper type from the lists of options.
4.
Touch the OK button to save your selection.
ENWW
Configure trays
101
Automatic paper sensing (auto-sense mode)
The automatic paper type sensor functions when a tray is configured to the Any Type or plain type setting.
After it has picked up paper from the tray, the product can detect overhead transparencies, paper weight, and gloss level.
For more control, select a specific paper type in the job or configure the tray for a specific paper type.
Auto-sense settings
Full sensing (Tray 1 only)
Expanded sensing
NOTE:
This is the default setting for all trays.
Transparency only
For each sheet of paper that it picks up from the tray, the product detects light paper, plain paper, heavy paper, glossy paper, tough paper, and transparencies.
For the first few sheets of paper that it picks up from the tray, the product detects light paper, plain paper, heavy paper, glossy paper, tough paper, and transparencies. The product assumes the rest of the pages are of the same type.
The product distinguishes between transparencies and non-transparencies. This setting provides the fastest printing, but for some paper types it might reduce print quality.
102 Chapter 6 Paper and print media ENWW
Select an output bin (fskm models only)
You can configure the product to use different output bins for printing, copying, and faxing. You can also configure the product to sort jobs according to the username associated with each job, or to stack all jobs from the lower bin to the upper bin.
NOTE:
You can also select output bins from the printer driver. Selections that you make in the printer driver override control-panel settings.
3
2
1
1
2
3
Upper-Left Bin
Middle-Left Bin
Lower-Left Bin
1.
From the Home screen, scroll to and touch the Administration menu.
2.
Open each of the following menus:
●
Stapler/Stacker Settings
●
Operation Mode
3.
To configure the product to sort jobs into different bins according to product function, select the
Function Separator option. Touch the OK button.
NOTE:
You can also select the Mailbox option to sort jobs according to the username associated with the job.
Select the Stacker option to stack all jobs into the lower output bin first. When the lower bin is full, jobs stack into the middle bin, and then into the upper bin.
ENWW
Select an output bin (fskm models only)
103
4.
To configure the bin for copy jobs, open these menus, and then select a bin from the list of options.
●
Administration
●
Copy Settings
●
Output Bin
5.
To configure the bin for printing incoming faxes, open these menus:
●
Administration
●
Fax Settings
●
Fax Receive Settings
●
Default Job Options
●
Output Bin
Select a bin from the list of options.
NOTE:
All stapled jobs always go to the lower bin.
NOTE:
For print jobs, select the output bin in the printer driver.
104 Chapter 6 Paper and print media ENWW
7 Manage supplies
●
●
●
●
●
ENWW 105
Print cartridge information
Feature
Part numbers
Accessibility
Environmental features
Description
●
Standard-capacity black print cartridge: CE260A
●
High-capacity black print cartridge: CE264X
●
Cyan print cartridge: CF031A
●
Yellow print cartridge: CF032A
●
Magenta print cartridge: CF033A
●
The print cartridges can be installed and removed by using one hand.
●
Recycle print cartridges by using the HP Planet Partners return and recycling program.
For more information about supplies, go to www.hp.com/go/learnaboutsupplies .
106 Chapter 7 Manage supplies ENWW
Supplies views
Print cartridge views
1
2
3
1
2
3
Plastic shield
Imaging drum
Print cartridge memory tag
ENWW
Supplies views
107
Manage print cartridges
Correctly using, storing, and monitoring the print cartridge can help ensure high-quality print output.
Settings for print cartridges
Print when a print cartridge is at estimated end of life
●
A <Color> <Supply> Low message—where <Color> is the color of the supply, and <Supply> is the type of supply—appears when a supply is nearing the estimated end of its useful life.
●
A <Color> <Supply> Very Low message appears when a supply is at its estimated end of useful life.
Print-quality problems can occur when using a supply that is at its estimated end of life.
Enable or disable the Very Low Settings options from the control panel
You can enable or disable the default settings at any time, and you do not have to re-enable them when you install a new cartridge.
1.
From the Home screen on the control panel, touch the Administration button.
2.
Open the following menus:
●
Manage Supplies
●
Supply Settings
●
Black Cartridge or Color Cartridges
●
Very Low Settings
3.
Select one of the following options:
●
Select the Continue option to set the product to alert you that the cartridge is very low, but to continue printing.
NOTE:
Using the Continue setting allows printing beyond Very Low without customer interaction and can result in unsatisfactory print quality.
●
Select the Stop option to set the product to stop printing (including printing faxes) until you replace the cartridge.
●
Select the Prompt to continue option to set the product to stop printing (including printing faxes) and prompt you to replace the cartridge. You can acknowledge the prompt and continue printing.
If you select the Stop or Prompt to continue option, the product stops printing when it reaches the Very
Low threshold. When you replace the cartridge, the product automatically resumes printing.
When the product is set to the Stop or Prompt to continue option, there is some risk that faxes will not print when the product resumes printing. This can occur if the product has received more faxes than the memory can hold while the product is waiting.
108 Chapter 7 Manage supplies ENWW
The product can print faxes without interruption when it passes the Very Low threshold if you select the
Continue option for color and black cartridges, but print quality might degrade.
Once an HP supply has reached Very Low, HP’s premium Protection Warranty on that supply has ended.
Recycle supplies
To recycle a genuine HP print cartridge, place the used cartridge in the box in which the new cartridge arrived. Use the enclosed return label to send the used supply to HP for recycling. For complete information, see the recycling guide that is included with each new HP supply item.
Print-cartridge storage
Do not remove the print cartridge from its package until you are ready to use it.
CAUTION:
To prevent damage to the print cartridge, do not expose it to light for more than a few minutes.
HP policy on non-HP print cartridges
Hewlett-Packard Company cannot recommend the use of non-HP print cartridges, either new or remanufactured.
NOTE:
Any damage caused by a non-HP print cartridge is not covered under the HP warranty and service agreements.
HP fraud hotline and Web site
Call the HP fraud hotline (1-877-219-3183, toll-free in North America) or go to www.hp.com/go/ anticounterfeit when you install an HP print cartridge and the control-panel message says the cartridge is non-HP. HP will help determine if the cartridge is genuine and take steps to resolve the problem.
Your print cartridge might not be a genuine HP print cartridge if you notice the following:
●
The supplies status page indicates that a non-HP supply is installed.
●
You are experiencing a high number of problems with the print cartridge.
●
The cartridge does not look like it usually does (for example, the packaging differs from
HP packaging).
ENWW
Manage print cartridges
109
Replacement instructions
Replace print cartridges
The product uses four colors and has a different print cartridge for each color: black (K), magenta (M), cyan (C), and yellow (Y).
CAUTION:
If toner gets on clothing, wipe it off with a dry cloth and wash the clothes in cold water.
Hot water sets toner into fabric.
NOTE:
Information about recycling used print cartridges is on the print-cartridge box.
1.
Open the front door. Make sure that the door is completely open.
2.
Grasp the handle of the used print cartridge and pull out to remove.
3.
Store the used print cartridge in a protective bag. Information about recycling used print cartridges is on the print-cartridge box.
110 Chapter 7 Manage supplies ENWW
4.
Remove the new print cartridge from its protective bag.
NOTE:
Be careful not to damage the memory tag on the print cartridge.
5.
Grasp both sides of the print cartridge and distribute the toner by gently rocking the print cartridge.
6.
Remove the orange protective cover from the print cartridge.
CAUTION:
Avoid prolonged exposure to light.
CAUTION:
Do not touch the green roller.
Doing so can damage the cartridge.
ENWW
Replacement instructions
111
7.
Align the print cartridge with its slot and insert the print cartridge until it clicks into place.
NOTE:
The print cartridges go in at a slight angle.
8.
Close the front door.
Replace the toner collection unit
Replace the toner collection unit when the control panel prompts you.
NOTE:
The toner collection unit is designed for a single use. Do not attempt to empty the toner collection unit and reuse it. Doing so could lead to toner being spilled inside the product, which could result in reduced print quality. After use, return the toner collection unit to HP’s Planet Partners program for recycling.
112 Chapter 7 Manage supplies ENWW
1.
Open the front door. Make sure that the door is completely open.
2.
Grasp the top of the toner collection unit and remove it from the product.
3.
Place the attached cap over the opening at the top of the unit.
ENWW
Replacement instructions
113
4.
Remove the new toner collection unit from its packaging.
5.
Insert the bottom of the new unit into the product first and then push the top of the unit until it clicks into place.
6.
Close the front door.
NOTE:
If the toner collection unit is not installed correctly, the front door does not close completely.
To recycle the used toner collection unit, follow the instructions included with the new toner collection unit.
114 Chapter 7 Manage supplies ENWW
Replace the staple cartridge
1.
Lift the gray latch on the front of the stapler, and open the stapler cover.
2.
Lift the green tab on the staple cartridge up, and then pull the staple cartridge straight out.
3.
Insert the new staple cartridge into the stapler and push down on the green handle until it snaps into place.
4.
Close the stapler cover.
ENWW
Replacement instructions
115
Solve problems with supplies
Check the print cartridges
Check the print cartridge, and replace it if necessary, if you are having any of the following problems:
●
The printing is too light or seems faded in areas.
●
Printed pages have small unprinted areas.
●
Printed pages have streaks or bands.
NOTE:
If you are using a draft or EconoMode print setting, the printing might appear light.
If you determine that you need to replace a print cartridge, print the supplies status page to find the part number for the correct genuine HP print cartridge.
Type of print cartridge
Refilled or remanufactured print cartridge
Genuine HP print cartridge
Steps to resolve the problem
Hewlett-Packard Company cannot recommend the use of non-HP supplies, either new or remanufactured. Because they are not HP products, HP cannot influence their design or control their quality. If you are using a refilled or remanufactured print cartridge and are not satisfied with the print quality, replace the cartridge with a genuine HP cartridge that has the words “HP” or “Hewlett-Packard” on it, or has the HP logo on it.
1.
The product control panel or the supplies status page indicates Very Low status when the cartridge has reached the end of its designated life. Replace the print cartridge if print quality is no longer acceptable.
2.
Visually inspect the print cartridge for damage. See the instructions that follow.
Replace the print cartridge if necessary.
3.
If printed pages have marks that repeat several times at the same distance apart, print a cleaning page. If this does not solve the problem, use the repeating defects information in this document to identify the cause of the problem.
116 Chapter 7 Manage supplies ENWW
Inspect the print cartridge for damage
1.
Remove the print cartridge from the product, and verify that the sealing tape has been removed.
2.
Check the memory chip for damage.
3.
Examine the surface of the green imaging drum on the bottom of the print cartridge.
CAUTION:
Do not touch the green roller (imaging drum) on the bottom of the cartridge.
Fingerprints on the imaging drum can cause print-quality problems.
4.
If you see any scratches, fingerprints, or other damage on the imaging drum, replace the print cartridge.
5.
If the imaging drum does not appear to be damaged, rock the print cartridge gently several times and reinstall it. Print a few pages to see if the problem has resolved.
ENWW
Solve problems with supplies
117
Repeating defects
If defects repeat at regular intervals on the page, use this ruler to identify the cause of the defect. Place the top of the ruler at the first defect. The marking that is beside the next occurrence of the defect indicates which component needs to be replaced.
Figure 7-1
Repetitive defects ruler
0 mm
27 mm
32 mm
44 mm
48 mm
51 mm
55 mm
63 mm
76 mm
80 mm
96 mm
101 mm
Distance between defects
27 mm
32 mm
44 mm
48 mm
51 mm
55 mm
63 mm
76 mm
76 mm
80 mm
96 mm
101 mm
118 Chapter 7 Manage supplies
Product components that cause the defect
Print cartridge
Print cartridge
Transfer unit
Print cartridge
Transfer roller
Print engine
Transfer unit
Print cartridge
Fuser
Fuser
Print engine
Print engine
ENWW
Print the Supplies Status page
The Supplies Status page indicates the estimated life remaining in print cartridges. It also lists the part number for the correct genuine HP print cartridge for your product so you can order a replacement print cartridge, as well as other useful information.
1.
Open the following menus:
●
Administration
●
Reports
●
Configuration/Status Pages
2.
Select the Supplies Status option, and then touch the Print button to print the report.
ENWW
Solve problems with supplies
119
Interpret control panel messages for supplies
The following table contains important information about supplies status messages.
Table 7-1 Supplies status messages
Control panel message Description
10.XX.YY Supply memory error
The product cannot read or write to at least one print cartridge memory chip or a memory chip is missing from a print cartridge.
Recommended action
Reinstall the print cartridge, or install a new print cartridge.
Black cartridge low
Black cartridge very low
Cyan cartridge low
XX values
●
00 = Memory chip memory error
●
10 = Memory chip missing
YY values
●
00 = Black
●
01 = Cyan
●
02 = Magenta
●
03 = Yellow
The product indicates when a supply level is low. Actual print cartridge life might vary.
You do not need to replace the print cartridge at this time unless print quality is no longer acceptable.
If print quality is no longer acceptable, replace the print cartridge. Consider purchasing a replacement cartridge so it is available when the installed cartridge has reached the end of its estimated life.
The product indicates when a supply level is very low. Actual print cartridge life might vary. You do not need to replace the print cartridge at this time unless print quality is no longer acceptable. After an HP supply has reached the very low threshold, the HP premium protection warranty for that supply has ended.
If print quality is no longer acceptable, replace the print cartridge. Consider purchasing a replacement cartridge so it is available when the installed cartridge has reached the end of its estimated life.
The product indicates when a supply level is low. Actual print cartridge life might vary.
You do not need to replace the print cartridge at this time unless print quality is no longer acceptable.
If print quality is no longer acceptable, replace the print cartridge. Consider purchasing a replacement cartridge so it is available when the installed cartridge has reached the end of its estimated life.
120 Chapter 7 Manage supplies ENWW
Table 7-1 Supplies status messages (continued)
Control panel message
Cyan cartridge very low
Fuser kit low
Fuser kit very low
Incompatible <color> cartridge
Incompatible fuser
Incompatible supplies
Incompatible transfer unit
Description Recommended action
The product indicates when a supply level is very low. Actual print cartridge life might vary. Consider having a replacement print cartridge available to install when print quality is no longer acceptable. You do not need to replace the print cartridge at this time unless print quality is no longer acceptable. After an HP supply has reached the very low threshold, the HP premium protection warranty for that supply has ended.
The fuser kit is low. The actual supply life remaining might vary. Consider having a replacement fuser kit available to install when print quality is no longer acceptable.
You do not need to replace the fuser kit at this time unless print quality is no longer acceptable.
The fuser kit is very low. The actual supply life remaining might vary. You do not need to replace the fuser kit at this time unless print quality is no longer acceptable. After an HP supply has reached the very low threshold, the HP premium protection warranty for that supply has ended.
If print quality is no longer acceptable, replace the print cartridge.
If print quality is no longer acceptable, replace the fuser kit. Instructions are included with the fuser kit.
If print quality is no longer acceptable, replace the fuser kit. Instructions are included with the fuser kit.
The indicated color print cartridge is not compatible with this product.
Replace the print cartridge with one that is designed for this product.
The fuser is not compatible with this product.
CAUTION:
The fuser can be hot while the product is in use. Wait for the fuser to cool before handling it.
Print cartridges or other supply items are installed that were not designed for this product. The product cannot print with these supplies installed.
The transfer unit is incompatible with this product.
1.
Open the right door.
2.
Remove the incompatible fuser.
3.
Install the correct fuser.
4.
Close the right door.
Touch the Supplies button to identify the incompatible supplies. Install supplies that are designed for this product.
1.
Open right door.
2.
Remove the incompatible transfer unit.
3.
Install the correct transfer unit.
4.
Close the right door.
ENWW
Solve problems with supplies
121
Table 7-1 Supplies status messages (continued)
Control panel message
Magenta cartridge low
Magenta cartridge very low
Replace <color> cartridge
Replace fuser kit
Replace supplies
Description Recommended action
The product indicates when a supply level is low. Actual print cartridge life might vary.
You do not need to replace the print cartridge at this time unless print quality is no longer acceptable.
If print quality is no longer acceptable, replace the print cartridge. Consider purchasing a replacement cartridge so it is available when the installed cartridge has reached the end of its estimated life.
The product indicates when a supply level is very low. Actual print cartridge life might vary. Consider having a replacement print cartridge available to install when print quality is no longer acceptable. You do not need to replace the print cartridge at this time unless print quality is no longer acceptable. After an HP supply has reached the very low threshold, the HP premium protection warranty for that supply has ended.
The product indicates when a supply level is at its estimated end of life. The actual life remaining might be different than the estimation. Have a replacement supply available to install when print quality is no longer acceptable. The supply does not need to be replaced now unless the print quality is no longer acceptable. After an HP supply has reached its approximated end of life,
HP’s premium Protection Warranty on that supply ends.
If print quality is no longer acceptable, replace the print cartridge.
Replace the specified color cartridge.
Or, configure the product to continue printing by using the Manage Supplies menu.
The product indicates when the fuser kit is at its estimated end of life. The actual life remaining might be different than the estimation. Have a replacement fuser kit available to install when print quality is no longer acceptable. The fuser kit does not need to be replaced now unless the print quality is no longer acceptable. After the fuser kit reaches its approximated end of life,
HP’s premium Protection Warranty on that fuser kit ends.
CAUTION:
The fuser can be hot while the product is in use. Wait for the fuser to cool before handling it.
1.
Open the right door.
2.
Grasp the blue handles on both sides of the fuser and pull straight out to remove it.
3.
Install the new fuser.
4.
Close the right door.
Touch the Supplies button to see which supplies need to be replaced.
Two or more supplies are at the estimated end of life. The actual life remaining might be different than the estimation. Consider having replacement supplies available to install when print quality is no longer acceptable. The supply does not need to be replaced now unless the print quality is no longer acceptable. After an HP supply has reached its approximated end of life, HP’s premium Protection Warranty on that supply ends.
Or, configure the product to continue printing by using the Manage Supplies menu.
122 Chapter 7 Manage supplies ENWW
Table 7-1 Supplies status messages (continued)
Control panel message
Replace toner collection unit
Replace transfer kit
Supplies in wrong position
Supplies low
Description Recommended action
The product indicates when a toner collection unit is at its estimated end of life.
The actual life remaining might be different than the estimation. Have a replacement toner collection unit available to install when print quality is no longer acceptable. The toner collection unit does not need to be replaced now unless the print quality is no longer acceptable. After a toner collection unit has reached its approximated end of life, HP’s premium Protection Warranty on that toner collection unit ends.
The product indicates when a transfer kit is at its estimated end of life. The actual life remaining might be different than the estimation. Have a replacement transfer kit available to install when print quality is no longer acceptable. The transfer kit does not need to be replaced now unless the print quality is no longer acceptable. After a transfer kit has reached its approximated end of life, HP’s premium Protection
Warranty on that transfer kit ends.
Two or more print-cartridge slots contain the wrong color print cartridge.
From left to right, the print cartridges should be installed in this order:
Replace the toner collection unit.
If you wish to have the toner collection unit operate past its estimated capacity, configure the product to continue printing by using the Manage Supplies menu. This is not a recommended option because of the risk of overfilling the toner collection unit, which could result in the need to service the product.
Replace the transfer kit. Instructions are included with the transfer kit.
Install the correct color cartridge in each slot.
●
Yellow
●
Magenta
●
Cyan
●
Black
This message appears when at least two supplies have reached the low threshold. The actual supply life remaining might vary.
Touch the Supplies button to see which supplies are low. You do not need to replace the supplies at this time unless print quality is no longer acceptable. After an HP supply has reached the very low threshold, the HP premium protection warranty for that supply has ended.
To continue printing in color, either replace the supply or reconfigure the product by using the Manage Supplies menu on the control panel.
ENWW
Solve problems with supplies
123
Table 7-1 Supplies status messages (continued)
Control panel message
Supplies very low
Toner collection unit low
Toner collection unit very low
Transfer kit low
Transfer kit very low
Unsupported supply installed
Used supply in use
Description Recommended action
This message appears when at least two supplies have reached the very low threshold. Touch the Supplies button to see which supplies are low. The actual supply life remaining might vary. You do not need to replace the supplies at this time unless print quality is no longer acceptable. After an HP supply has reached the very low threshold, the HP premium protection warranty for that supply has ended.
To continue printing in color, either replace the supply or reconfigure the product by using the Manage Supplies control panel.
menu on the
The toner collection unit is almost full. The actual supply life remaining might vary. You do not need to replace the toner collection unit at this time unless print quality is no longer acceptable.
To continue printing, either touch the OK button or replace the toner collection unit.
The toner collection unit is almost full, and the product is configured to stop at this point.
The actual supply life remaining might vary.
After an HP supply has reached the very low threshold, the HP premium protection warranty for that supply has ended.
Reconfigure the product to continue printing, or replace the toner collection unit.
CAUTION:
Continuing to print when the toner collection unit is full could damage the product.
No action is necessary to continue. If the print quality is no longer acceptable, replace the transfer kit. Instructions are included with the new transfer kit.
This message appears when the transfer kit reaches the low threshold. The actual supply life remaining might vary. You do not need to replace the transfer kit at this time unless print quality is no longer acceptable.
This message appears when the transfer kit has reached the very low threshold. The actual supply life remaining might vary. You do not need to replace the supplies at this time unless print quality is no longer acceptable. After an HP supply has reached the very low threshold, the HP premium protection warranty for that supply has ended.
One of the print cartridges is for a different
HP product.
One of the print cartridges has been previously used.
To continue printing, either replace the transfer kit or reconfigure the product to continue printing by using the
Supplies
If print quality is no longer acceptable, replace the print cartridge.
If you believe you purchased a genuine HP supply, go to www.hp.com/go/ anticounterfeit .
Manage
menu on the control panel.
124 Chapter 7 Manage supplies ENWW
Table 7-1 Supplies status messages (continued)
Control panel message
Wrong cartridge in <color> slot
Yellow cartridge low
Yellow cartridge very low
Description
The indicated slot for a print cartridge contains a cartridge that is not the correct color. From left to right, the print cartridges should be installed in this order:
● Yellow
●
Magenta
Recommended action
Remove the print cartridge from that slot, and install a cartridge that is the correct color.
●
Cyan
● Black
The product indicates when a supply level is low. Actual print cartridge life might vary.
You do not need to replace the print cartridge at this time unless print quality is no longer acceptable.
The product indicates when a supply level is very low. Actual print cartridge life might vary. Consider having a replacement print cartridge available to install when print quality is no longer acceptable. You do not need to replace the print cartridge at this time unless print quality is no longer acceptable. After an HP supply has reached the very low threshold, the HP premium protection warranty for that supply has ended.
If print quality is no longer acceptable, replace the print cartridge. Consider purchasing a replacement cartridge so it is available when the installed cartridge has reached the end of its estimated life.
If print quality is no longer acceptable, replace the print cartridge.
ENWW
Solve problems with supplies
125
126 Chapter 7 Manage supplies ENWW
8 Print tasks
●
Cancel a print job with Windows
●
Basic print tasks with Windows
●
Additional print tasks with Windows
●
ENWW 127
Cancel a print job with Windows
NOTE:
If the print job is too far into the printing process, you might not have the option to cancel it.
1.
If the print job is currently printing, cancel it by following this procedure:
a. Press the Stop button on the control panel.
b. From the list on the touchscreen, touch the print job you want to delete, and touch the Cancel
Job button.
c.
The product prompts you to confirm the deletion. Touch the Yes button.
2.
You can also cancel a print job from a software program or a print queue.
●
Software program: Typically, a dialog box appears briefly on the computer screen, allowing you to cancel the print job.
●
Windows print queue: If a print job is waiting in a print queue (computer memory) or print spooler, delete the job there.
◦
Windows XP, Server 2003, or Server 2008: Click Start, click Settings, and then click Printers and Faxes. Double-click the product icon to open the window, right-click the print job that you want to cancel, and then click Cancel.
◦
Windows Vista: Click Start, click Control Panel, and then, under Hardware
and Sound, click Printer. Double-click the product icon to open the window, rightclick the print job that you want to cancel, and then click Cancel.
◦
Windows 7: Click Start, and then click Devices and Printers. Double-click the product icon to open the window, right-click the print job that you want to cancel, and then click Cancel.
128 Chapter 8 Print tasks ENWW
Basic print tasks with Windows
The methods to open the print dialog from software programs can vary. The procedures that follow include a typical method. Some software programs do not have a File menu. See the documentation for your software program to learn how to open the print dialog.
Open the printer driver with Windows
1.
On the File menu in the software program, click Print.
2.
Select the product, and then click the
Properties or Preferences button.
ENWW
Basic print tasks with Windows
129
Get help for any printing option with Windows
1.
Click the Help button to open the online Help.
Change the number of print copies with Windows
1.
On the File menu in the software program, click Print.
2.
Select the product, and then select the number of copies.
130 Chapter 8 Print tasks ENWW
Save custom print settings for reuse with Windows
Use a printing shortcut with Windows
1.
On the File menu in the software program, click Print.
2.
Select the product, and then click the
Properties or Preferences button.
ENWW
Basic print tasks with Windows
131
3.
Click the Printing Shortcuts tab.
4.
Select one of the shortcuts, and then click the
OK button.
NOTE:
When you select a shortcut, the corresponding settings change on the other tabs in the printer driver.
Create printing shortcuts
1.
On the File menu in the software program, click Print.
132 Chapter 8 Print tasks ENWW
2.
Select the product, and then click the
Properties or Preferences button.
3.
Click the Printing Shortcuts tab.
4.
Select an existing shortcut as a base.
NOTE:
Always select a shortcut before adjusting any of the settings on the right side of the screen. If you adjust the settings and then select a shortcut, all your adjustments are lost.
ENWW
Basic print tasks with Windows
133
5.
Select the print options for the new shortcut.
6.
Click the Save As button.
7.
Type a name for the shortcut, and click the OK button.
134 Chapter 8 Print tasks ENWW
Improve print quality with Windows
Select the page size with Windows
1.
On the File menu in the software program, click Print.
2.
Select the product, and then click the Properties or Preferences button.
3.
Click the Paper/Quality tab.
4.
Select a size from the Paper size drop-down list.
Select a custom page size with Windows
1.
On the File menu in the software program, click Print.
2.
Select the product, and then click the Properties or Preferences button.
3.
Click the Paper/Quality tab.
4.
Click the Custom button.
5.
Type a name for the custom size, specify the dimensions, and click the OK button.
Select the paper type with Windows
1.
On the File menu in the software program, click Print.
2.
Select the product, and then click the Properties or Preferences button.
3.
Click the Paper/Quality tab.
4.
From the Paper type drop-down list, click the More... option.
5.
Expand the list of Type is: options.
6.
Expand the category of paper types that best describes your paper, and then click the paper type that you are using.
Select the paper tray with Windows
1.
On the File menu in the software program, click Print.
2.
Select the product, and then click the Properties or Preferences button.
3.
Click the Paper/Quality tab.
4.
Select a tray from the Paper source drop-down list.
Select the gloss level with Windows
1.
On the File menu in the software program, click Print.
2.
Select the product, and then click the Properties or Preferences button.
ENWW
Basic print tasks with Windows
135
3.
Click the Paper/Quality tab.
4.
In the Print Quality area, select the gloss level from the first drop-down list.
Print on both sides (duplex) with Windows
1.
On the File menu in the software program, click Print.
2.
Select the product, and then click the
Properties or Preferences button.
136 Chapter 8 Print tasks ENWW
3.
Click the Finishing tab.
4.
Select the Print on both sides check box.
Click the OK button to print the job.
Print multiple pages per sheet with Windows
1.
On the File menu in the software program, click Print.
ENWW
Basic print tasks with Windows
137
2.
Select the product, and then click the
Properties or Preferences button.
3.
Click the Finishing tab.
138 Chapter 8 Print tasks ENWW
4.
Select the number of pages per sheet from the
Pages per sheet drop-down list.
5.
Select the correct Print page borders,
Page order, and Orientation options.
Select page orientation with Windows
1.
On the File menu in the software program, click Print.
ENWW
Basic print tasks with Windows
139
2.
Select the product, and then click the
Properties or Preferences button.
3.
Click the Finishing tab.
4.
In the Orientation area, select the Portrait or Landscape option.
To print the page image upside down, select the Rotate by 180 degrees option.
140 Chapter 8 Print tasks ENWW
Set color options with Windows
1.
On the File menu in the software program, click Print.
2.
Select the product, and then click the
Properties or Preferences button.
3.
Click the Color tab.
ENWW
Basic print tasks with Windows
141
4.
Click the HP EasyColor check box to clear it.
5.
In the Color Options area, click the
Manual option, and then click the Settings button.
6.
Adjust the general settings for Edge Control, and settings for text, graphics, and photographs.
142 Chapter 8 Print tasks ENWW
Additional print tasks with Windows
Print colored text as black (grayscale) with Windows
1.
On the File menu in the software program, click Print.
2.
Select the product, and then click the Properties or Preferences button.
3.
Click the Advanced tab.
4.
Expand the Document Options section.
5.
Expand the Printer Features section.
6.
In the Print All Text as Black drop-down list, select the Enabled option.
Print on preprinted letterhead or forms with Windows
1.
On the File menu in the software program, click Print.
2.
Select the product, and then click the
Properties or Preferences button.
ENWW
Additional print tasks with Windows
143
3.
Click the Paper/Quality tab.
4.
From the Paper type drop-down list, click the
More... option.
5.
Expand the list of Type is: options.
144 Chapter 8 Print tasks ENWW
6.
Expand the list of Other options.
7.
Select the option for the type of paper you are using, and click the OK button.
Print on special paper, labels, or transparencies
1.
On the File menu in the software program, click Print.
ENWW
Additional print tasks with Windows
145
2.
Select the product, and then click the
Properties or Preferences button.
3.
Click the Paper/Quality tab.
4.
From the Paper type drop-down list, click the
More... option.
146 Chapter 8 Print tasks ENWW
5.
Expand the list of Type is: options.
6.
Expand the category of paper types that best describes your paper.
NOTE:
Labels and transparencies are in the list of Other options.
7.
Select the option for the type of paper you are using, and click the OK button.
ENWW
Additional print tasks with Windows
147
Print the first or last page on different paper with Windows
1.
On the File menu in the software program, click Print.
2.
Select the product, and then click the
Properties or Preferences button.
3.
Click the Paper/Quality tab.
148 Chapter 8 Print tasks ENWW
4.
In the Special pages area, click the Print
pages on different paper option, and then click the Settings button.
5.
In the Pages in document area, select either the First or Last option.
6.
Select the correct options from the Paper
source and Paper type drop-down lists.
Click the Add button.
ENWW
Additional print tasks with Windows
149
7.
If you are printing both the first and last pages on different paper, repeat steps 5 and 6, selecting the options for the other page.
8.
Click the OK button.
Scale a document to fit page size with Windows
1.
On the File menu in the software program, click Print.
150 Chapter 8 Print tasks ENWW
2.
Select the product, and then click the
Properties or Preferences button.
3.
Click the Effects tab.
4.
Select the Print document on option, and then select a size from the drop-down list.
ENWW
Additional print tasks with Windows
151
Add a watermark to a document with Windows
1.
On the File menu in the software program, click Print.
2.
Select the product, and then click the Properties or Preferences button.
3.
Click the Effects tab.
4.
Select a watermark from the Watermarks drop-down list.
Or, to add a new watermark to the list, click the Edit button. Specify the settings for the watermark, and then click the OK button.
5.
To print the watermark on the first page only, select the First page only check box. Otherwise, the watermark is printed on each page.
Create a booklet with Windows
1.
On the File menu in the software program, click Print.
2.
Select the product, and then click the
Properties or Preferences button.
152 Chapter 8 Print tasks ENWW
3.
Click the Finishing tab.
4.
Select the Print on both sides check box.
5.
In the Booklet layout drop-down list, click the Left binding or Right binding option.
The Pages per sheet option automatically changes to 2 pages per sheet.
ENWW
Additional print tasks with Windows
153
Select output options with Windows (fskm models only)
Select an output bin with Windows
1.
On the File menu in the software program, click Print.
2.
Select the product, and then click the
Properties or Preferences button.
154 Chapter 8 Print tasks ENWW
3.
Click the Output tab.
4.
In the Output Bin Options area, select a bin from the Bin drop-down list.
Select staple options with Windows
1.
On the File menu in the software program, click Print.
ENWW
Additional print tasks with Windows
155
2.
Select the product, and then click the
Properties or Preferences button.
3.
Click the Output tab.
4.
In the Output Options area, select an option from the Staple drop-down list.
156 Chapter 8 Print tasks ENWW
Use job storage features with Windows
The following job-storage modes are available for print jobs:
●
Proof and Hold: This feature provides a quick way to print and proof one copy of a job and then print more copies.
●
Personal Job: When you send a job to the product, the job does not print until you request it at the product control panel. If you assign a personal identification number (PIN) to the job, you must provide the required PIN at the control panel.
●
Quick Copy: If the optional hard disk is installed on the product, you can print the requested number of copies of a job and then store a copy of the job on the optional hard disk. Storing the job allows you to print additional copies of the job later.
●
Stored Job: If the optional hard disk is installed on the product, you can store a job such as a personnel form, time sheet, or calendar on the product and allow other users to print the job at any time. Stored jobs also can be protected by a PIN.
CAUTION:
If you turn off the product, all Quick Copy, Proof and Hold, and Personal Job types of stored jobs are deleted. To permanently store the job and prevent the product from deleting it when space is needed for something else, select the Stored Job option in the driver.
Create a stored job with Windows
1.
On the File menu in the software program, click Print.
2.
Select the product, and then click the
Properties or Preferences button.
ENWW
Additional print tasks with Windows
157
3.
Click the Job Storage tab.
4.
Select a Job Storage Mode option.
Print a stored job
Use the following procedure to print a job that is stored in the product memory.
1.
From the Home screen, touch the Open from
Device Memory button.
158 Chapter 8 Print tasks ENWW
2.
Select the name of the folder where the job is stored.
3.
Select the name of the job, adjust the number of copies, and then touch the Start button to print the job.
4.
If the job is locked, type the PIN in the PIN field, adjust the number of copies, and then touch the Start button to print the job.
Delete a stored job
When you send a stored job to the product memory, the product overwrites any previous jobs with the same user and job name. If a job is not already stored under the same user and job name, and the product needs additional space, the product might delete other stored jobs starting with the oldest. You can change the number of jobs that can be stored from the General Settings menu on the product control panel.
Use this procedure to delete a job that is stored in the product memory.
1.
From the Home screen, touch the Open from Device Memory button.
2.
Select the name of the folder where the job is stored.
3.
Select the name of the job, and then touch the Delete button.
4.
If the job is locked, type the PIN in the PIN field, and then touch the Delete button.
Set job storage options with Windows
Print one copy for proof before printing all the copies
1.
On the File menu in the software program, click Print.
2.
Select the product, and then click the Properties or Preferences button.
ENWW
Additional print tasks with Windows
159
3.
Click the Job Storage tab.
4.
In the Job Storage Mode area, click the Proof and Hold option.
Temporarily store a personal job on the product and print it later
NOTE:
The product deletes the job after you print it.
1.
On the File menu in the software program, click Print.
2.
Select the product, and then click the Properties or Preferences button.
3.
Click the Job Storage tab.
4.
In the Job Storage Mode area, click the Personal Job option.
5.
Optional: In the Make Job Private area, click the PIN to print option, and enter a 4-digit personal identification number (PIN).
6.
Print the job at any time from the product control panel.
Temporarily store a job on the product
NOTE:
This option is available if the optional hard disk is installed in the product.
NOTE:
The product stores the job until you turn the product off.
1.
On the File menu in the software program, click Print.
2.
Select the product, and then click the Properties or Preferences button.
3.
Click the Job Storage tab.
4.
In the Job Storage Mode area, click the Quick Copy option.
The requested number of copies are printed immediately, and you can print more copies from the product control panel.
Permanently store a job on the product
NOTE:
This option is available if the optional hard disk is installed in the product.
1.
On the File menu in the software program, click Print.
2.
Select the product, and then click the Properties or Preferences button.
3.
Click the Job Storage tab.
4.
In the Job Storage Mode area, click the Stored Job option.
160 Chapter 8 Print tasks ENWW
Make a permanently stored job private so that anyone who tries to print it must provide a
PIN
NOTE:
This option is available if the optional hard disk is installed in the product.
1.
On the File menu in the software program, click Print.
2.
Select the product, and then click the Properties or Preferences button.
3.
Click the Job Storage tab.
4.
In the Job Storage Mode area, click the Stored Job option or the Personal Job option.
5.
In the Make Job Private area, click the PIN to print option, and enter a 4-digit personal identification number (PIN).
NOTE:
To print the job or to delete it, you must provide the PIN at the product control panel.
Receive notification when someone prints a stored job
NOTE:
Only the person who created the stored job receives notification. You do not receive notification when someone prints a stored job that another person has created.
1.
On the File menu in the software program, click Print.
2.
Select the product, and then click the Properties or Preferences button.
3.
Click the Job Storage tab.
4.
Select the job storage mode that you want.
5.
In the Job Notifications Options area, click the Display Job ID when printing option.
Set the user name for a stored job
Follow this procedure to change the user name for a stored job.
1.
On the File menu in the software program, click Print.
2.
Select the product, and then click the Properties or Preferences button.
3.
Click the Job Storage tab.
4.
Select the job storage mode that you want.
5.
In the User Name area, click the User name option to use the Windows default user name. To provide a different user name, click the Custom option and type the name.
Specify a name for the stored job
Follow this procedure to change the default name for a stored job.
1.
On the File menu in the software program, click Print.
2.
Select the product, and then click the Properties or Preferences button.
ENWW
Additional print tasks with Windows
161
3.
Click the Job Storage tab.
4.
Select the job storage mode that you want.
5.
To automatically generate the job name associated with the stored document, in the Job Name area, click the Automatic option. The driver uses the document file name, if it is available. If the document has no file name, the driver uses the software program name or a time stamp for the job name.
To specify a job name, click the Custom option and type the name.
6.
Select an option from the If job name exists drop-down list.
●
Select the Use Job Name + (1-99) option to add a number to the end of the existing name.
●
Select the Replace Existing File option to overwrite a job that already has that name.
Print special jobs with Windows
Print business graphics or marketing material
You can use this product to print marketing and sales material or other color documents on glossy paper. To maximize the quality of this output you must do the following:
1.
Choose the appropriate paper. See the following table.
2.
At the product control panel, configure the paper tray for the correct paper type.
3.
Select the corresponding settings in the printer driver.
Supported glossy paper
HP glossy paper product Product code Product size
Letter
Control panel and print driver settings
HP soft gloss 120g
HP Laser Presentation Paper,
Soft Gloss
HP Laser Presentation Paper,
Glossy
HP Laser Presentation Paper,
Glossy
HP Laser Professional Paper,
Soft Gloss
HP Laser Brochure Paper,
Glossy
Q6541A
Q2546A
Q2552A
Q6542A
Q6611A, Q6610A
HP Laser Superior Paper,
Glossy
Q6616A
HP Laser Photo Paper, Glossy Q6607A, Q6608A
HP Laser Photo Paper, Glossy Q6614A
Letter
A4
A4
Letter
A4
Letter
A4
HP glossy 130g
HP glossy 130g
HP soft gloss 120g
HP glossy 160g
HP glossy 160g
HP glossy 220g
HP glossy 220g
162 Chapter 8 Print tasks ENWW
HP glossy paper product Product code
HP Laser Photo Paper, Glossy
4x6
HP Laser Photo Paper, Glossy
10 cm x 15 cm
Q8842A
Q8843A
Product size Control panel and print driver settings
101.6 x 152.4 mm (4 x 6 in) HP glossy 220g
101.6 x 152.4 mm (4 x 6 in) HP glossy 220g
NOTE:
In the United States, see www.hp.com/go/paper for a complete list of HP brand paper.
Print weatherproof maps and outdoor signs
The product can print durable, waterproof maps, signs, or menus by using HP Tough Paper. HP Tough
Paper is a waterproof, tear-proof, satin finish paper that retains rich, vibrant print color and clarity even when exposed to heavy usage or weather. This avoids expensive and time-consuming lamination. To maximize the quality of this output you must do the following:
●
Choose the appropriate paper. See the following table.
●
At the product control panel, configure the paper tray for the correct paper type.
●
Select the corresponding settings in the printer driver.
Supported tough paper
HP paper name
HP LaserJet Tough Paper
HP LaserJet Tough Paper
Product code
Q1298A
Q1298B
Product size
Letter
A4
Control panel and print driver settings
HP Tough Paper
HP Tough Paper
Set the duplex alignment
For documents that are printed on both sides, such as brochures, set the registration for the tray before printing to ensure that the front and back of the page are aligned.
1.
From the Home screen, touch the Administration button.
2.
Open the following menus:
a.
General Settings
b.
Print Quality
c.
Image Registration
d.
Adjust Tray <X>
3.
Touch the Print Test Page setting, and then touch the OK button.
4.
Follow the instructions on the test page to complete the adjustment.
ENWW
Additional print tasks with Windows
163
Walk-up USB printing
This product features walk-up USB printing, so you can quickly print files without sending them from a computer. The product accepts standard USB storage accessories in the USB port on the front of the product. You can print the following types of files:
●
●
.prn
●
.pcl
●
.ps
●
.cht
1.
Insert the USB storage accessory into the USB port on the front of the product.
NOTE:
You might need to remove the cover from the USB port
2.
The Open from USB screen opens. Select a folder from the list on the left side of the screen.
3.
Select the name of the document that you want to print.
164 Chapter 8 Print tasks ENWW
4.
If you need to adjust the number of copies, touch the Copies field, and then use the keypad to select the number of copies.
5.
Touch the Start button to print the document.
ENWW
Walk-up USB printing
165
166 Chapter 8 Print tasks ENWW
9 Color
●
●
ENWW 167
Adjust color
Manage color by changing the settings on the Color tab in the printer driver.
Change the color theme for a print job
1.
On the File menu in the software program, click Print.
2.
Click Properties or Preferences.
3.
Click the Color tab.
4.
Select a color theme from the Color Themes drop-down list.
●
Default (sRGB): This theme sets the product to print RGB data in raw device mode. When using this theme, manage color in the software program or in the operating system for correct rendering.
●
Vivid: The product increases the color saturation in the midtones. Use this theme when printing business graphics.
●
Photo: The product interprets RGB color as if it were printed as a photograph using a digital mini lab. The product renders deeper, more saturated colors differently than with the Default (sRBG) theme. Use this theme when printing photos.
●
Photo (Adobe RGB 1998): Use this theme with printing digital photos that use the AdobeRGB color space rather than sRGB. Turn off color management in the software program when using this theme.
●
None: No color theme is used.
168 Chapter 9 Color ENWW
Change the color options
Change the color options settings for the current print job from the color tab of the printer driver.
1.
On the File menu in the software program, click Print.
2.
Click Properties or Preferences.
3.
Click the Color tab.
4.
Click the Automatic or Manual setting.
●
Automatic setting: Select this setting for most color print jobs
●
Manual setting: Select this setting to adjust the color settings independent from other settings.
NOTE:
Changing color settings manually can impact output. HP recommends that only color graphics experts change these settings.
ENWW
5.
Click the Print in Grayscale option to print a color document in black and shades of gray. Use this option to print color documents for photocopying or faxing. You can also use this option to print draft copies or to save color toner.
6.
Click the OK button.
Adjust color
169
Manual color options
Use manual color options to adjust the Neutral Grays, Halftone, and Edge Control options for text, graphics, and photographs.
Table 9-1 Manual color options
Setting description
Edge Control
The Edge Control setting determines the rendering of edges. Edge control has two components: adaptive halftoning and trapping. Adaptive halftoning increases edge sharpness. Trapping reduces the effect of color-plane misregistration by overlapping the edges of adjacent objects slightly.
Halftone
Halftone options affect color output clarity and resolution.
Neutral Grays
The Neutral Grays setting determines the method for creating gray colors used in text, graphics, and photographs.
Setting options
● Off turns off both trapping and adaptive halftoning.
●
Light sets trapping at a minimal level. Adaptive halftoning is on.
●
Normal sets trapping at a medium level. Adaptive halftoning is on.
●
Maximum is the most aggressive trapping setting. Adaptive halftoning is on.
●
Smooth provides better results for large, solid-filled print areas and enhances photographs by smoothing color gradations. Select this option when uniform and smooth area fills are important.
●
Detail is useful for text and graphics that require sharp distinctions among lines or colors, or images that contain a pattern or a high level of detail. Select this option when sharp edges and small details are important.
●
Black Only generates neutral colors (grays and black) by using only black toner. This guarantees neutral colors without a color cast. This setting is best for documents and grayscale viewgraphs.
●
4-Color generates neutral colors (grays and black) by combining all four toner colors. This method produces smoother gradients and transitions to other colors, and it produces the darkest black.
170 Chapter 9 Color ENWW
Use the HP EasyColor option
If you are using the HP PCL 6 printer driver for Windows, the HP EasyColor technology automatically improves mixed-content documents that are printed from Microsoft Office programs. This technology scans documents and automatically adjusts photographic images in .JPEG or .PNG format.
HP EasyColor technology enhances the entire image at one time, rather than dividing it into several pieces, which results in improved color consistency, sharper details, and faster printing.
If you are using the HP Postscript printer driver for Mac, HP EasyColor technology scans all documents and automatically adjusts all photographic images with the same improved photographic results.
In the following example, the images on the left were created without using the HP EasyColor option.
The images on the right show the enhancements that result from using the HP EasyColor option.
The HP EasyColor option is enabled by default in both the HP PCL 6 printer driver and the HP Mac
Postscript printer driver, so you do not need to make manual color adjustments. To disable the option so you can manually adjust the color settings, open the Color tab in the Windows driver or the Color/
Quality Options tab in the Mac driver, and then click the HP EasyColor check box to clear it.
ENWW
Adjust color
171
Match colors
The process of matching product output color to your computer screen is quite complex because printers and computer monitors use different methods of producing color. Monitors display colors by light pixels using an RGB (red, green, blue) color process, but printers print colors using a CMYK (cyan, magenta, yellow, and black) process.
Several factors can influence your ability to match printed colors to those on your monitor. These factors include:
●
Paper
●
Printer colorants (inks or toners for example)
●
Printing process (inkjet, press, or laser technology for example)
●
Overhead lighting
●
Personal differences in perception of color
●
Software programs
●
Printer drivers
●
Computer operating system
●
Monitors and monitor settings
●
Video cards and drivers
●
Operating environment (humidity for example)
Keep the above factors in mind when colors on your screen do not perfectly match your printed colors.
For most users, the best method for matching colors on your screen to your product is to print sRGB colors.
Sample book color matching
The process for matching product output to preprinted sample books and standard color references is complex. In general, you can obtain a reasonably good match to a sample book if the inks used to create the sample book are cyan, magenta, yellow, and black. These are usually referred to as process color sample books.
Some sample books are created from spot colors. Spot colors are specially created colorants. Many of these spot colors are outside of the range of the product. Most spot color sample books have companion process sample books that provide CMYK approximations to the spot color.
Most process sample books will state which process standards were used to print the sample book. In most cases they will be SWOP, EURO, or DIC. To get optimal color matching to the process sample book, select the corresponding ink emulation from the product menu. If you cannot identify the process standard, use SWOP ink emulation.
172 Chapter 9 Color ENWW
Print color samples
To use the color samples, select the color sample that is the closest match to the desired color. Use the sample’s color value in your software program to describe the object you wish to match. Colors may vary depending on paper type and the software program used. For more details on how to use the color samples, go to www.hp.com/support/cljcm4540mfp .
Use the following procedure to print color samples at the product using the control panel:
1.
From the Home screen, open the following menus:
a.
Administration
b.
Reports
c.
Other Pages
2.
Select either the Color Samples for RGB or the CMYK Values option, and touch the OK button.
PANTONE® color matching
PANTONE has multiple color matching systems. PANTONE MATCHING SYSTEM® is very popular and uses solid inks to generate a wide range of color hues and tints. See www.hp.com/go/ cljcm4540mfp_software for details on how to use PANTONE Colors with this product.
NOTE:
PANTONE Colors generated might not match PANTONE-identified standards. Consult current
PANTONE Publications for accurate color.
ENWW
Match colors
173
174 Chapter 9 Color ENWW
10 Copy
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
ENWW 175
Use copy functions
Copy
Use the scanner glass to make as many as 9999 copies of small, lightweight paper (less than 60 g/m or 16 lb) or heavy paper (more than 105 g/m
2
or 28 lb). This includes paper such as receipts, newspaper clippings, photographs, old documents, worn documents, and books.
2
Use the document feeder to make as many as 9999 copies of a document that has up to 50 pages
(depending on the thickness of the pages).
1.
To copy from the scanner glass, place the original document face-down on the glass. Align the corner of the original with the upper-left corner of the glass.
2.
To copy from the document feeder, place the document into the document feeder with the pages facing up.
3.
To make copies by using the default copy options, use the keypad on the control panel to select the number of copies, and touch the Start button.
Cancel a copy job
1.
Press the Stop button on the control panel and then touch the name of the job.
2.
Touch the Cancel Job button, and then touch the OK button.
176 Chapter 10 Copy ENWW
Reduce or enlarge a copy image
1.
From the Home screen, touch the Copy button.
2.
Touch the Reduce/Enlarge button.
3.
Select one of the predefined percentages, or touch the Scaling field and type a percentage between 25 and 400. Touch the OK button.
You can also select these options:
●
Auto : The product automatically scales the image to fit the paper size in the tray.
●
Auto Include Margins : The product reduces the image slightly to fit the entire scanned image within the printable area on the page.
NOTE:
To reduce the image, select a scaling percentage that is less than 100. To enlarge the image, select a scaling percentage that is greater than 100.
4.
Touch the Start button.
ENWW
Use copy functions
177
Collate a copy job
1.
From the Home screen, touch the Copy button.
2.
Touch the Collate button or the Staple/Collate button.
3.
Touch the Collate on (Sets in page order) option.
4.
Touch the Start button.
Make color copies or black and white copies
1.
From the Home screen, touch the Copy button.
2.
Touch the Color/Black button.
3.
Select the color option that you want to use, and then touch the OK button.
178 Chapter 10 Copy ENWW
Copy settings
Change copy quality
Optimize the copy image for text or pictures
1.
From the Home screen, touch the Copy button.
2.
Touch the More Options button, and then touch the Optimize Text/Picture button.
3.
Select one of the predefined options, or touch the Manually adjust button and then adjust the slider in the Optimize For area. Touch the OK button.
4.
Touch the Start button.
Check the scanner glass for dirt or smudges
Over time, specks of debris might collect on the scanner glass and white plastic backing, which can affect performance. Use the following procedure to clean the scanner glass and white plastic backing.
ENWW
Copy settings
179
1.
Use the power switch to turn off the product, and then unplug the power cord from the electrical socket.
2.
Open the scanner lid.
180 Chapter 10 Copy ENWW
3.
Clean the scanner glass and the white plastic backing with a soft cloth or sponge that has been moistened with nonabrasive glass cleaner. Dry the glass and white plastic backing with a chamois or a cellulose sponge to prevent spotting.
CAUTION:
Do not use abrasives, acetone, benzene, ammonia, ethyl alcohol, or carbon tetrachloride on any part of the product; these can damage the product. Do not place liquids directly on the glass or platen. They might seep and damage the product.
4.
Plug in the product, and then use the power switch to turn on the product.
Adjust the copy lightness/darkness
1.
From the Home screen, touch the Copy button.
2.
Touch the Image Adjustment button.
ENWW
Copy settings
181
3.
Adjust the sliders to set the Darkness level, the
Contrast , the Sharpness level, and the
Background Cleanup level. Touch the OK button.
4.
Touch the Start button.
182 Chapter 10 Copy ENWW
Define custom copy settings
You can use the Administration menu to establish default settings that apply to all copy jobs. If necessary, you can override most settings for an individual job. After that job is complete, the product returns to the default settings.
1.
From the Home screen, scroll to and touch the Administration menu.
2.
Open the Copy Settings menu.
3.
Several options are available. You can configure defaults for all options, or for only some options.
NOTE:
To learn about each menu option, touch the Help button in the upper-right corner of the screen for that option.
Set the paper size and type for copying on special paper
1.
From the Home screen, touch the Copy button.
2.
Touch the Paper Selection button.
3.
Select the tray that holds the paper that you want to use, and then touch the OK button.
ENWW
Copy settings
183
Restore copy default settings
1.
From the Home screen, open the following menus:
●
Administration
●
General Settings
●
Restore Factory Settings
2.
Select the Copy check box, and then touch the Reset button.
184 Chapter 10 Copy ENWW
Copy a book
1.
Lift the lid and place the book on the scanner glass with the spine aligned with the mark on the rear, center of the scanner glass.
2.
Gently close the lid.
3.
On the control panel, touch the Copy button.
4.
Touch the Start button.
5.
Repeat these steps for each page that you want to copy.
NOTE:
This product does not have the capability to distinguish left and right pages. Assemble the copied pages carefully.
ENWW
Copy a book
185
Copy a photo
NOTE:
Copy photos from the scanner glass.
1.
Lift the lid and place the photo on the scanner glass with the picture-side down and the upper-left corner of the photo in the upper-left corner of the glass.
2.
Gently close the lid.
3.
On the control panel, touch the Copy button.
4.
Touch the Optimize Text/Picture button, and select the Photograph button.
5.
Touch the Start button.
186 Chapter 10 Copy ENWW
Create a stored copy job
Use this procedure to scan a document and save it on the product so you can print copies at any time.
1.
Place the document face-down on the scanner glass or face-up in the document feeder.
2.
From the Home screen, touch the Save to Device Memory button.
NOTE:
If prompted, type your user name and password.
3.
Select an existing folder, or touch the New Folder button to create a new folder.
4.
Type the name for the file in the File Name text field, and select the file type from the File Type drop-down list.
5.
To configure settings for the document, touch the More Options button.
6.
Touch the Start button to save the file.
ENWW
Create a stored copy job
187
Copy mixed-size originals
You can copy original documents that are printed on different sizes of paper as long as the sheets of paper have one common dimension. For example, you could combine Letter and Legal sizes.
1.
Arrange the sheets in the original document so they all have the same width.
2.
Place the sheets face-up into the document feeder, and adjust both paper guides against the document.
3.
On the control panel, touch the Copy button.
4.
Touch the Original Size button.
NOTE:
If this option is not on the first screen, touch the More Options button until the option displays.
5.
Select the Mixed Letter/Legal button, and then touch the OK button.
6.
Touch the Start button.
188 Chapter 10 Copy ENWW
Copy on both sides (duplex)
1.
Load the original documents into the document feeder with the first page facing up, and with the top of the page leading.
2.
On the control panel, touch the Copy button.
3.
Touch the Sides button.
4.
To make a two-sided copy from a one-sided original, touch the 1-sided original, 2-sided output button.
To make a two-sided copy from a two-sided original, touch the 2-sided original, 2-sided output button.
To make a one-sided copy from a two-sided original, touch the 2-sided original, 1-sided output button.
Touch the OK button.
5.
Touch the Start button.
ENWW
Copy on both sides (duplex)
189
Use Job Build mode
Use the Job Build feature to combine several sets of original documents into one copy job. Also use this feature to copy an original document that has more pages than the document feeder can accommodate at one time.
1.
Load the original document face-up in the document feeder or face-down on the scanner glass.
2.
On the control panel, touch the Copy button.
3.
Scroll to and touch the Job Build button.
4.
Touch the Job Build on button.
5.
Touch the OK button.
6.
If necessary, select the desired copy options.
7.
Touch the Start button. After each page is scanned, the control panel prompts you for more pages.
8.
If the job contains more pages, load the next page, and then touch the Scan button.
The product temporarily saves all the scanned images. Touch the Finish button to finish printing the copies.
190 Chapter 10 Copy ENWW
11 Scan and send documents
●
●
●
ENWW 191
Set up scan/send features
The product offers the following scan and send features:
●
Scan and save files to a folder on your network.
●
Scan and save files to the product hard drive.
●
Scan and save files to a USB flash drive.
●
Scan and send documents to one or more e-mail addresses.
Some scan and send features are not available on the product control panel until you use the
HP Embedded Web Server to enable them.
NOTE:
To find detailed information about using the HP Embedded Web Server, click the Help link in the upper-right corner of each HP Embedded Web Server page.
1.
Open a Web page, and type the product IP address in the address line.
2.
When the HP Embedded Web Server opens, click the Scan/Digital Send tab.
3.
If you did not previously use the HP Scan to Email Setup Wizard to set up the E-mail feature, you can enable it by using the HP Embedded Web Server.
a. Click the E-mail Setup link.
b. Select the E-mail check box to enable the feature.
c.
Select the outgoing mail server to use, or click the Add button to add a different server to the list.
NOTE:
If you don't know the name of the mail server, you can usually find it by opening your e-mail program and looking at the outgoing mail configuration settings.
d. In the Address and Message Field Control area, configure the default setting for the
From address.
e. Configuring the other settings is optional.
f.
When you are finished, click the Save Settings button.
4.
Enable the Save to Network Folder feature.
a. Click the Save to Network Folder Setup link.
b. Select the Save to Network Folder check box to enable the feature.
c.
In the Quick Sets area, click the Add button.
d. On the next screen, provide a name and a description for the Quick Set and specify the location where you want the Quick Set to appear on the control panel. Click the Next button.
e. On the next screen, select the type of Quick Set folder to use, and then click the Next button.
192 Chapter 11 Scan and send documents ENWW
f.
Continue through the screens and select the default options you want to apply to the Quick
Set.
g. On the Summary screen, review the settings and then click the Finish button.
5.
Enable the Save to USB feature.
a. Click the Save to USB Setup link.
b. Select the Enable Save to USB check box.
c.
Click the Apply button at the bottom of the page.
ENWW
Set up scan/send features
193
Use scan/send functions
Sign in
Some features on the product control panel can be secured so that unauthorized people cannot use them. When a feature is secured, the product prompts you to sign in before you can use it. You can also sign in without waiting for a prompt by touching the Sign In button on the Home screen.
Typically, you use the same user name and password that you use to sign in to your computer on the network. Consult the network administrator for this product if you have questions about which credentials to use.
After you have signed in to the product a Sign Out button appears on the control panel. To maintain security for the product, touch the Sign Out button when you have finished using the product.
Change default scan/send settings from the product control panel
1.
From the Home screen, scroll to and touch the
Administration button.
2.
Open the Scan/Digital Send Settings menu.
3.
Select the category of scan and send settings that you want to configure.
4.
Open the Default Job Options menu, and configure the options. Touch the OK button to save the settings.
194 Chapter 11 Scan and send documents ENWW
Send a scanned document
Send a scanned document to a network folder
The product can scan a file and save it in a folder on the network. The following operating systems support this feature:
●
Windows Server 2003, 64-bit
●
Windows Server 2008, 64-bit
●
Windows XP, 64-bit
●
Windows Vista, 64-bit
●
Windows 7, 64-bit
●
Novell v5.1 and later (access to the Quick Sets folders only)
NOTE:
You might be required to sign in to the product to use this feature.
The system administrator can use the HP Embedded Web Server to configure pre-defined Quick Sets folders, or you can provide the path to another network folder.
1.
Place the document face-down on the scanner glass or face-up in the document feeder.
2.
From the Home screen, touch the Save to
Network Folder button.
NOTE:
If prompted, type your user name and password.
3.
To use one of the preset job settingss, select one of the items in the Quick Sets list.
ENWW
Send a scanned document
195
4.
To set up a new job, type the name for the file in the File Name text field, and type the path to the network folder in the Network Folder
Path field. Use this format for the path:
\\path\path
5.
To configure settings for the document, touch the More Options button.
6.
Touch the Start button to save the file.
Send a scanned document to a folder in the product memory
Use this procedure to scan a document and save it on the product so you can print copies at any time.
1.
Place the document face-down on the scanner glass or face-up in the document feeder.
2.
From the Home screen, touch the Save to
Device Memory button.
NOTE:
If prompted, type your user name and password.
196 Chapter 11 Scan and send documents ENWW
3.
Select an existing folder, or touch the New
Folder button to create a new folder.
4.
Type the name for the file in the File Name text field.
5.
To configure settings for the document, touch the More Options button.
6.
Touch the Start button to save the file.
Send a scanned document to a USB flash drive
The product can scan a file and save it in a folder on a USB flash drive.
NOTE:
You might be required to sign in to the product to use this feature.
1.
Place the document face-down on the scanner glass or face-up in the document feeder.
ENWW
Send a scanned document
197
2.
From the Home screen, touch the Save to USB button.
NOTE:
If prompted, type your user name and password.
3.
Select one of the folders in the list, or touch the
New Folder button to create a new folder on the USB flash drive.
4.
Type the name for the file in the File Name text field, and select the file type from the File Type drop-down list.
5.
To configure settings for the document, touch the More Options button.
6.
Touch the Start button to save the file.
Send to e-mail
The product e-mail feature offers the following benefits:
●
Sends documents to one or more e-mail addresses.
●
Delivers files in black-and-white or in color.
●
You can send files in different file formats that the recipient can manipulate.
198 Chapter 11 Scan and send documents ENWW
Supported protocols
The product supports Simple Mail Transfer Protocol (SMTP) and Lightweight Directory Access Protocol
(LDAP).
SMTP
In order to use the e-mail feature, the product needs to be connected to a valid SMTP local area network that includes Internet access.
●
SMTP is a set of rules that define the interaction between programs that send and receive e-mail.
In order for the product to send documents to e-mail, it must be connected to a LAN that has access to an e-mail server that supports SMTP.
●
If you are using a LAN connection, contact your system administrator to obtain the IP address or host name for your SMTP server. If you are connecting through a DSL or cable connection, contact the internet service provider to obtain the SMTP server IP address.
LDAP
●
LDAP is used to gain access to a database of information. When the product uses LDAP, it searches a global list of e-mail addresses. As you begin to type the e-mail address, LDAP uses an auto-complete feature that supplies a list of e-mail addresses that match the characters you type.
As you type additional characters, the list of matching e-mail addresses becomes smaller.
●
The product supports LDAP, but a connection to an LDAP server is not required in order for the product to be able to send to e-mail.
NOTE:
If you need to change the LDAP settings, you must change them by using the
HP Embedded Web Server.
Configure e-mail server settings
Before you can send a document to e-mail, you must configure the product.
NOTE:
The instructions that follow are for configuring the product at the control panel. You can also perform these procedures by using the HP Embedded Web Server. Using the E-mail Setup Wizard menu is the simplest way to configure the e-mail settings.
NOTE:
The e-mail icon is not shown on the control panel if e-mail is not configured.
1.
From the Home screen, scroll to and touch the
Administration menu.
ENWW
Send a scanned document
199
2.
Open the Scan/Digital Send Settings menu.
3.
Open the E-mail Settings menu.
4.
Open the E-mail Setup Wizard menu, and follow the on-screen instructions.
Send a scanned document to one or more e-mail addresses
1.
Place the document face-down on the scanner glass or face-up in the document feeder.
2.
From the Home screen, touch the E-mail button.
NOTE:
If prompted, type your user name and password.
200 Chapter 11 Scan and send documents ENWW
3.
Touch the text box next a field to open a keypad.
NOTE:
If you are signed in to the product, your user name or other default information might appear in the From field. If so, you might not be able to change it.
4.
Type the appropriate information for the field.
To send to multiple addresses, separate the addresses with a semicolon, or touch the Enter button on the touchscreen keypad after you type each address.
5.
To change the settings for the document touch the More Options button.
6.
If you are sending a two-sided document, select the Original Sides menu and select the
2-sided option.
7.
Touch the Start button to begin sending.
ENWW
Send a scanned document
201
Use the address book
You can send e-mail to a list of recipients by using the address book. Depending on how the product is configured, you might have one or more of the following address book viewing options.
●
All Contacts : Lists all the contacts that are available to you.
●
Personal Contacts : Lists all the contacts that are associated with your user name. These contacts are not visible to other people who use the product.
NOTE:
You must be signed in to the product to see the Personal Contacts list.
●
Local Contacts : Lists all the contacts that are stored in the product memory. These contacts are visible to all people who use the product.
Add contacts to the address book from the product control panel
If you are signed in to the product, contacts that you add to the address book will not be visible to other people who use the product.
If you are not signed in to the product, contacts that you add to the address book will be visible to all people who use the product.
NOTE:
You can also use the HP Embedded Web Server (EWS) to create and manage the address book.
1.
From the Home screen, touch the E-mail button.
NOTE:
If prompted, type your user name and password.
2.
Touch the address book button that is next to the To field to open the Address Book screen.
3.
Touch the Add contact button that is in the lower left corner of the screen.
202 Chapter 11 Scan and send documents ENWW
4.
In the Name text field, type the name of the contact.
5.
From the drop-down list, select the E-mail
Address option, and then type the contact's email address.
Touch the OK button to add the contact to the list.
Send a document to e-mail by using the address book
1.
Place the document face-down on the scanner glass or face-up in the document feeder.
2.
From the Home screen, touch the E-mail button.
NOTE:
If prompted, type your user name and password.
3.
Touch the address book button that is next to the To field to open the Address Book screen.
ENWW
Send a scanned document
203
4.
From the drop-down list, select the address book view that you want to use.
5.
Select a name from the list of contacts, and then touch the right arrow button to add the name to the recipients list.
Repeat this step for each recipient, and then touch the OK button.
6.
Touch the Start button to begin sending.
204 Chapter 11 Scan and send documents ENWW
12 Fax
●
●
●
●
ENWW 205
Setup
Introduction
The HP LaserJet Analog Fax Accessory 500 enables the HP multifunction product (MFP) to function as a standalone analog fax machine. For more information, see www.hp.com/go/ ljanalogfaxaccessory500_manuals .
NOTE:
In addition to the analog fax feature, the product also supports LAN and internet faxing. Only one fax method can be enabled at a time.
NOTE:
If the product came with the fax accessory installed, remove the fax connection cover, connect the phone cord, and then perform the initial fax configuration. The fax connection cover is located on the phone connector on the formatter rear panel.
HP LaserJet Analog Fax Accessory 500 features
Send-fax features
●
Speed dials
●
Fax address book
●
Resolution and image-adjustment options
●
Billing codes
206 Chapter 12 Fax ENWW
Receive-fax features
Advanced fax features
Remote fax configuration
Security features
●
Stamp received faxes
● Block incoming faxes
●
Fax polling
●
Adjustable rings-to-answer
●
Notification of fax status
●
JBIG compression
●
Error correction
●
Fax archive
●
Embedded Web server
●
HP Web Jetadmin
●
HP MFP Digital Sending Software
●
Fax-printing schedule
Verify fax operation
When the fax accessory is installed and operating correctly, the fax icon displays on the product control panel. If the fax accessory has just been installed but has not been configured, the fax icon is grayed-out. If this occurs, use the instructions that follow to configure the fax accessory.
Required fax settings
After the fax accessory is installed, you must configure certain settings before you can use the accessory. If these settings are not configured, the fax icon is grayed-out. These settings include:
●
Country/region
●
Date/Time
●
Company Name
●
Fax Number
●
Dialing Prefix (optional)
This information is used in the fax header, which is printed on all outgoing faxes.
NOTE:
When first installed, the fax accessory might read some of these settings from the product; therefore, a value may already be set. You should check the values to verify that they are set and correct.
NOTE:
In the U.S. and many other countries/regions, setting the date, time, country/region, phone number, and company name is a legal requirement for fax.
ENWW
Setup
207
Fax Setup Wizard
The Fax Setup Wizard guides you through a step-by-step procedure to configure fax settings that are required to use the fax feature. If the settings are not configured, the fax feature is disabled.
The first time the product is turned on with a fax accessory installed, access the Fax Setup Wizard by following these steps:
1.
From the Home screen, touch the Initial Setup button.
2.
Touch the Fax Setup Wizard menu.
3.
Follow the steps in the Fax Setup Wizard to configure the required settings.
4.
When the Fax Setup Wizard finishes, the option to hide the Initial Setup button appears on the
Home screen.
Access the Fax Setup Wizard after initial setup through the control panel by following these steps:
1.
From the Home screen, scroll to and touch the Administration button.
2.
Open the following menus:
●
Fax Settings
●
Fax Send Settings
●
Fax Send Setup
●
Fax Setup Wizard
Follow these steps to configure the required fax settings using the Fax Setup Wizard:
1.
Touch your country/region on the first screen of the Fax Setup Wizard and then touch the Next button.
2.
Touch the date and time boxes to enter the date/time, and then touch the Next button.
3.
Touch the Company Name and Fax Number boxes to enter your company name and fax number, and then touch the Next button.
4.
Touch the Dialing Prefix box to enter your dialing prefix, if required, and then touch the Next button.
5.
Confirm your fax configuration settings on the final screen of the Fax Setup Wizard. Touch the
Finish button to complete the Fax Setup Wizard.
-or-
Touch the Back button to move back through the Fax Setup Wizard screens and make changes to your configuration entries.
NOTE:
The settings configured using the Fax Setup Wizard on the control panel override any settings made in the embedded Web server.
208 Chapter 12 Fax ENWW
NOTE:
If the Fax Setup menu settings does not appear in the menu listing, LAN or internet fax might be enabled. When LAN or internet fax is enabled, the analog fax accessory is disabled and the fax menu does not display. Only one fax feature, either LAN fax, analog fax or internet fax, can be enabled at a time. The fax icon displays for either fax feature. If you wish to use analog fax when LAN fax is enabled, use the HP MFP Digital Sending Software Configuration Utility or the product embedded
Web server to disable LAN fax.
Set or verify the date and time
The date and time setting for the fax accessory is the same value as the product date and time setting.
This information can be entered using the Fax Setup Wizard, or by following these steps:
1.
From the Home screen, scroll to and touch the Administration button.
2.
Open the following menus:
●
General Settings
●
Date/Time Settings
●
Date/Time
3.
Touch the correct Time Zone setting for your locale.
4.
Touch the Month drop down menu and select a month.
5.
Touch the boxes next to the Date drop down menu to enter the day and year from the keypad.
6.
Touch the boxes below the Time heading to enter the hour and minutes from the keypad and then touch the AM or PM button.
7.
Touch the Adjust for Daylight Savings feature, if necessary.
8.
Touch the Save button to save the settings.
Set or verify the date/time format
The date and time format setting for the fax accessory is in the same format as the product date and time setting. This information can be entered using the Fax Setup Wizard, or by following these steps:
1.
From the Home screen, scroll to and touch the Administration button.
2.
Open the following menus:
●
General Settings
●
Date/Time Settings
●
Date/Time Format
3.
Touch a Date Format option.
4.
Touch a Time Format option.
5.
Touch the Save button to save the settings.
ENWW
Setup
209
Set fax settings
Remote fax configuration
In addition to using the product control panel, you can configure the fax accessory remotely by using various software tools. Because the product contains an embedded Web server (EWS), you can configure the fax accessory across the Web by using either a Web browser or HP Web Jetadmin
(WJA). In addition, you can configure the fax accessory across the network with a network-connected computer by using the HP MFP Digital Sending Software Configuration Utility (DSS). These tools provide access to most of the fax accessory configuration settings that available from the product fax menu.
Web browser
The product contains an embedded Web server (EWS). The EWS allows you to use a Web browser to access and set the analog-fax settings.
1.
Type the IP address of the product in the browser URL address bar and press Enter to open the
EWS Configure product screen. To get the IP address of the product, print a product Configuration page.
NOTE:
If DSS is being used, a message appears on EWS indicating that DSS is in control. The only way to change settings is through DSS.
2.
Click the Fax tab. The Fax Send Setup screen displays.
3.
On the Fax Send Setup screen, click Enable Fax Send to enable the fax. Make any changes to the common job settings and to the specific settings for the type of fax being used, and then click the Apply button to accept the settings.
HP Web Jetadmin
To access the product analog-fax settings by using HP Web Jetadmin, perform the following steps. For detailed information about HP Web Jetadmin, see the HP Web Jetadmin Reference Manual.
1.
Start HP Web Jetadmin.
2.
In the At a Glance text box, type the IP address of the product in the Quick Device Find text box, and then click the Go button to see the device status in the right pane. Select Digital
Sending and Fax from the status drop-down menu in that pane.
3.
Configure the options in the Fax Settings section or the Advanced Fax Settings section. For information about a specific setting, select the context help next to the setting.
4.
After you have made changes to the settings, click the Apply button to accept the settings.
In addition to configuring a single product, you can also perform multiple device configuration. Multiple device mode configures several products at once. For information about this feature, see the Web
Jetadmin User Guide available under the Self Help and Documentation tab at www.hp.com/ go/webjetadmin .
210 Chapter 12 Fax ENWW
HP MFP Digital Sending Software Configuration Utility
To access the analog MFP fax settings by using the DSS configuration utility, perform the following steps.
1.
Start the utility (on the computer or server) to open the main screen.
2.
Select the product and click the Configure MFP button on the main screen, and then click the
Send to Fax tab to open the Fax Settings screen.
3.
To enable the fax capabilities on the product, select the Enable Fax Send option. To access
Analog-fax settings, select Internal Modem in the Fax Send Method drop-down list. On the
Common Job Settings tab, make any changes to the settings and click the Apply button to accept the settings. Select the Internal Modem tab to set additional fax settings.
In addition to configuring a single product, you can also configure multiple devices. For more information about the HP MFP Digital Sending Software Configuration Utility, see the HP MFP Digital
Sending Software User Guide or the HP MFP Digital Sending Software Support Guide.
NOTE:
Depending on the capabilities and settings of your fax method, some of these options might not be available or configurable.
Send fax settings
Fax send setup
Use the Fax Send Setup menu to configure the following features:
●
Fax Setup Wizard
●
Fax Dialing Settings
●
General Fax Send Settings
●
Billing Codes
Fax Setup Wizard
The Fax Setup Wizard guides you through a step-by-step procedure to configure fax settings that are required to use the fax feature. If the settings are not configured, the fax feature is disabled.
The first time the product is turned on with a fax accessory installed, access the fax setup wizard by following these steps:
1.
From the Home screen, touch the Initial Setup button.
2.
Touch the Fax Setup Wizard menu.
3.
Follow the steps in the Fax Setup Wizard to configure the required settings.
4.
When the Fax Setup Wizard finishes, the option to hide the Initial Setup button appears on the
Home screen.
ENWW
Set fax settings
211
Access the Fax Setup Wizard after initial setup through the control panel by following these steps:
1.
From the Home screen, scroll to and touch the Administration button.
2.
Open the following menus:
●
Fax Settings
●
Fax Send Settings
●
Fax Send Setup
●
Fax Setup Wizard
Follow these steps to configure the required fax settings using the Fax Setup Wizard:
1.
Touch your country/region on the first screen of the Fax Setup Wizard and then touch the Next button.
2.
Touch the date and time boxes to enter the date/time, and then touch the Next button.
3.
Touch the Company Name and Fax Number boxes to enter your company name and fax number, and then touch the Next button.
4.
Touch the Dialing Prefix box to enter your dialing prefix, if required, and then touch the Next button.
5.
Confirm your fax configuration settings on the final screen of the Fax Setup Wizard. Touch the
Finish button to complete the Fax Setup Wizard.
-or-
Touch the Back button to move back through the Fax Setup Wizard screens and make changes to your configuration entries.
NOTE:
The settings configured using the Fax Setup Wizard on the control panel override any settings made in the embedded Web server.
NOTE:
If the Fax Setup menu settings does not appear in the menu listing, LAN fax might be enabled. When LAN fax is enabled, the analog fax accessory is disabled and the fax menu does not display. Only one fax feature, either LAN fax, analog fax or internet fax, can be enabled at a time. The fax icon displays for either fax feature. If you wish to use analog fax when LAN fax is enabled, use the
HP MFP Digital Sending Software Configuration Utility to disable LAN fax.
212 Chapter 12 Fax ENWW
Fax dialing settings
Set the fax dial volume
Use the Fax Dial Volume setting to control the product's dialing volume level when sending faxes.
1.
From the Home screen, scroll to and touch the Administration button.
2.
Open the following menus:
●
Fax Settings
●
Fax Send Settings
●
Fax Send Setup
●
Fax Dialing Settings
3.
Touch the Fax Dial Volume drop-down menu and select one of the following settings:
●
Off
●
Low (default)
●
High
4.
Touch the Save button to save the fax volume setting.
Set the dialing mode
The dialing mode setting sets the type of dialing that is used: either tone (touch-tone phones) or pulse
(rotary-dial phones).
To set the dialing mode, perform the following steps.
1.
From the Home screen, scroll to and touch the Administration button.
2.
Open the following menus:
●
Fax Settings
●
Fax Send Settings
●
Fax Send Setup
●
Fax Dialing Settings
3.
Touch the Dialing Mode drop down menu and select either the Tone option (default) or Pulse option to set the fax dialing mode.
4.
Touch the Save button.
ENWW
Set fax settings
213
Set fax send speed
The Fax send speed setting sets the modem bit rate (measured in bits per second) of the Analog Fax modem while sending a fax.
1.
From the Home screen, scroll to and touch the Administration button.
2.
Open the following menus:
●
Fax Settings
●
Fax Send Settings
●
Fax Send Setup
●
Fax Dialing Settings
3.
Touch the drop down menu under the Fax Send Speed heading and then touch one of the following:
●
Fast (default) — 33600 bps (bits per second)
●
Medium — 14400 bps
●
Slow — 9600 bps
4.
Touch the Save button.
Set the redial interval
The redial interval setting selects the number of minutes between retries if the number dialed is busy or not answering.
NOTE:
You might observe a redial message on the control panel when both the Redial-on-Busy and Redial-on-No-Answer settings are set to off. This occurs when the fax accessory dials a number, establishes a connection, and then loses the connection. As a result of this error condition, the fax accessory performs two automatic redial attempts regardless of the redial settings (the first one at
26,400 bps and, if that fails, a second one at 14,400 bps). During this redial operation, a message appears on the control panel to indicate that a redial is in progress.
1.
From the Home screen, scroll to and touch the Administration button.
2.
Open the following menus:
●
Fax Settings
●
Fax Send Settings
●
Fax Send Setup
●
Fax Dialing Settings
3.
Touch the Redial Interval text box to display the keypad.
4.
Enter the value (1–5, default is 5) and touch the OK button.
5.
Touch the Save button.
214 Chapter 12 Fax ENWW
Set redial on error
The Redial on error feature sets the number of times a fax number will be redialed when an error occurs during a fax transmission.
1.
From the Home screen, scroll to and touch the Administration button.
2.
Open the following menus:
●
Fax Settings
●
Fax Send Settings
●
Fax Send Setup
●
Fax Dialing Settings
3.
Touch the Redial on error box to open the keypad.
4.
Enter a value (0–9, default is 2) and then touch the OK button.
5.
Touch the Save button.
Set redial-on-busy
The redial-on-busy setting selects the number of times (0 through 9) the fax accessory redials a number when the number is busy. The interval between retries is set by the Redial Interval setting.
1.
From the Home screen, scroll to and touch the Administration button.
2.
Open the following menus:
●
Fax Settings
●
Fax Send Settings
●
Fax Send Setup
●
Fax Dialing Settings
3.
Touch the Redial On Busy text box to display the keypad.
4.
Enter a value (0–9, default is 3) and then touch the OK button.
5.
Touch the Save button.
ENWW
Set fax settings
215
Set redial-on-no-answer
The redial-on-no-answer setting selects the number of times the fax accessory redials if the number dialed does not answer. The number of retries is either 0 to 1 (used in the U.S.) or 0 to 2, depending on the country/region setting. The interval between retries is set by the redial interval setting.
1.
From the Home screen, scroll to and touch the Administration button.
2.
Open the following menus:
●
Fax Settings
●
Fax Send Settings
●
Fax Send Setup
●
Fax Dialing Settings
3.
Touch the Redial On No Answer text box to display the keypad.
4.
Enter a value (0–2, default is 0) and then touch the OK button.
5.
Touch the Save button.
Set the dial tone detection
The detect dial tone setting determines whether the fax checks for a dial tone before sending a fax.
1.
From the Home screen, scroll to and touch the Administration button.
2.
Open the following menus:
●
Fax Settings
●
Fax Send Settings
●
Fax Send Setup
●
Fax Dialing Settings
3.
Touch the Detect Dial Tone setting; a checkmark appears next to the Detect Dial Tone setting when selected. The default setting is unchecked (disabled).
4.
Touch the Save button to enable dial tone detection.
Set a dialing prefix (if required)
The dialing prefix setting allows you to enter a prefix number (such as a "9" to access an outside line) when dialing. This prefix number is automatically added to all phone numbers when dialed.
216 Chapter 12 Fax ENWW
NOTE:
You might need a pause between the prefix and the phone number. To insert a 2–second pause, enter a comma (,), pound sign (#), or a “P”. To add an extension number, use “X”.
1.
From the Home screen, scroll to and touch the Administration button.
2.
Open the following menus:
●
Fax Settings
●
Fax Send Settings
●
Fax Send Setup
●
Fax Dialing Settings
3.
Touch the Dialing Prefix text box to display the keypad.
4.
Type your dialing prefix number on the keypad and then touch the OK button.
5.
Touch the Save button.
General fax send settings
Use the General Fax Send Settings menu to configure the following features:
●
Fax Number Confirmation
●
PC Fax Send
●
Fax Header
●
JBIG Compression
●
Error Correction Mode
Activate Fax Number Confirmation
When fax number confirmation is enabled, the fax number must be entered twice to ensure that it was entered correctly. The default setting for this feature is Disabled .
1.
From the Home screen, scroll to and touch the Administration button.
2.
Open the following menus:
●
Fax Settings
●
Fax Send Settings
●
Fax Send Setup
●
General Fax Send Settings
3.
Touch the Fax Number Confirmation box to enable fax number confirmation.
4.
Touch the Save button.
ENWW
Set fax settings
217
Enable PC fax send
Use the PC fax send feature to send faxes from a PC. This feature is enabled by default. If this feature is disabled, use the following steps to enable:
NOTE:
The PC fax send driver must be installed on the computer from where the faxes will be sent.
1.
From the Home screen, scroll to and touch the Administration button.
2.
Open the following menus:
●
Fax Settings
●
Fax Send Settings
●
Fax Send Setup
●
General Fax Send Settings
3.
Touch the PC Fax Send box.
4.
Touch the Save button.
Fax header
Use the fax header feature to control whether the header is appended to the top, and content is shifted down, or if the header is overlayed on top of the fax image.
1.
From the Home screen, scroll to and touch the Administration button.
2.
Open the following menus:
●
Fax Settings
●
Fax Send Settings
●
Fax Send Setup
●
General Fax Send Settings
3.
Touch the Prepend (default) or Overlay option in the Fax Header section to orientate the fax header.
4.
Touch the Save button.
Set the JBIG compression mode
Enabling JBIG compression can reduce phone-call charges by reducing fax transmission time and is, therefore, the preferred setting. However, JBIG might cause compatibility problems when communicating with some older fax machines, in which case you might need to disable it.
NOTE:
JBIG compression only works when both the sending and receiving machines have JBIG compression.
218 Chapter 12 Fax ENWW
To enable or disable JBIG compression, perform the following steps.
1.
From the Home screen, scroll to and touch the Administration button.
2.
Open the following menus:
●
Fax Settings
●
Fax Send Settings
●
Fax Send Setup
●
General Fax Send Settings
3.
Touch the JBIG Compression feature (default) to enable JBIG compression.
4.
Touch the Save button.
Set the error correction mode
Normally, the fax accessory monitors the signals on the telephone line while it is sending or receiving a fax. If the fax accessory detects an error during the transmission and the error correction setting is on, the fax accessory can request that the error portion of the fax be sent again.
Error correction mode is enabled by default. You should turn off error correction only if you are having trouble sending or receiving a fax and if you are willing to accept the errors in the transmission and a probable quality reduction in the image. Turning off the setting might be useful when you are trying to send a fax overseas or receive one from overseas, or if you are using a satellite telephone connection.
NOTE:
Some VOIP providers may suggest turning error correction mode off. However, this is not usually necessary.
If error correction mode is disabled, follow these steps to enable:
1.
From the Home screen, scroll to and touch the Administration button
2.
Open the following menus:
●
Fax Settings
●
Fax Send Settings
●
Fax Send Setup
●
General Fax Send Settings
3.
Touch the Error Correction Mode check box to enable error correction mode if it is disabled
(unchecked).
4.
Touch the Save button.
Set billing codes
The billing-code setting, when enabled, prompts the user to enter a number when sending a fax. This number is placed in the billing-code report. To view the billing-code report, either print the report or query it by using an application.
ENWW
Set fax settings
219
Billing codes are disabled by default. Follow these steps to enable billing codes:
1.
From the Home screen, scroll to and touch the Administration button.
2.
Open the following menus:
●
Fax Settings
●
Fax Send Settings
●
Fax Send Setup
●
Billing Codes
3.
Touch the Enable Billing Codes feature to enable billing codes.
NOTE:
To disable billing codes, deselect the Enable Billing Codes feature, touch the Save button, and then skip the remaining steps.
To allow users to edit billing codes, touch the Allow users to edit billing codes feature.
4.
Touch the Default Billing Code text box to open the keyboard.
5.
Enter the billing code and then touch the OK button.
6.
Touch the Minimum Length text box to open the keypad.
7.
Type the minimum number of digits you want in the billing code, and then touch the OK button.
8.
Touch the Save button.
Default job options
The following default job options are available for configuration:
●
Image Preview
●
Resolution
●
Original Sides
●
Notification
●
Content Orientation
●
Original Size
●
Image Adjustment
●
Optimize Text/Picture
●
Job Build
●
Blank Page Suppression
NOTE:
Default job option settings are shared across all fax methods; analog, LAN, and internet fax.
220 Chapter 12 Fax ENWW
Image preview
1.
From the Home screen, scroll to and touch the Administration button.
2.
Open the following menus:
●
Fax Settings
●
Fax Send Settings
●
Default Job Options
●
Image Preview
3.
The following option is available:
●
Disable preview
4.
Touch the Save button.
Set the outgoing fax resolution
The outgoing fax resolution setting determines the maximum resolution supported by the receiving fax.
The fax accessory uses the highest possible resolution (as limited by this setting) and the maximum resolution of the receiving fax.
NOTE:
Faxes wider than 21.25 cm (8.5 inches) are automatically sent by using standard or fine resolution, to reduce phone time.
NOTE:
The default resolution setting is a lower dpi than previous product model default resolution settings. For example, previous product models had a default resolution of FINE (200 x 200 dpi).
NOTE:
The higher the resolution, the longer the transmission time required.
NOTE:
LAN fax settings resolution settings vary by vendor and may differ from the settings listed below.
1.
From the Home screen, scroll to and touch the Administration button.
2.
Open the following menus:
●
Fax Settings
●
Fax Send Settings
●
Default Job Options
●
Resolution
3.
Touch one of the following resolution settings:
●
Standard (100 x 200dpi) (default)
●
Fine (200 x 200dpi)
●
Superfine (300 x 300dpi)
4.
Touch the Save button.
ENWW
Set fax settings
221
Original sides
1.
From the Home screen, scroll to and touch the Administration button.
2.
Open the following menus:
●
Fax Settings
●
Fax Send Settings
●
Default Job Options
●
Original Sides
3.
Touch one of the following options:
●
1-sided (default)
●
2-sided
4.
Touch the Orientation button to set the page orientation.
5.
Touch the Save button.
Notification
Notification selects when and how you are notified of the status of an outgoing fax. This setting applies to the current fax only. To change the setting permanently, change the default setting.
1.
From the Home screen, touch the Fax menu.
2.
Open the following menus:
●
Fax Settings
●
Fax Send Settings
●
Default Job Options
●
Notification
3.
Touch one of the following notification settings:
●
Do not notify (default)
●
Notify when job completes
●
Notify only if job fails
4.
Touch the Print option to receive a printed notification, or touch the E-mail option to receive an email notification.
5.
If you selected the Print option, touch the Save button to complete the notification setup.
-or-
222 Chapter 12 Fax ENWW
If you selected the E-mail option, use the keyboard to type an e-mail address. Then touch the OK button to complete the notification setup.
6.
Touch the Include Thumbnail check box to include a thumbnail image with notifications.
Content orientation
Use the content orientation feature to set how the fax content is oriented on the page. For 1–sided pages, choose Portrait (short-edge on top, default setting) or Landscape (long-edge on top). For 2–sided pages, choose Book-style (short-edge on top) or Flip-style (long-edge on top).
1.
From the Home screen, scroll to and touch the Administration button.
2.
Open the following menus:
●
Fax Settings
●
Fax Send Settings
●
Default Job Options
●
Content Orientation
3.
Touch Portrait (default) or Landscape for 1-sided pages.
4.
Touch Book-style or Flip-style for 2-sided pages.
5.
Touch the Save button.
Original size
Use the Original size feature to match your fax content to the size of the original document.
1.
From the Home screen, scroll to and touch the Administration button.
2.
Open the following menus:
●
Fax Settings
●
Fax Send Settings
●
Default Job Options
●
Original Size
3.
Touch one of the following options:
●
Auto detect (default)
●
Letter (8.5x11)
●
Mixed Letter/Legal
●
Legal (8.5 x 14)
●
Executive (7.25 x 10.5)
●
Statement (8.5 x 5.5)
ENWW
Set fax settings
223
●
Legal (8.5 x 13)
●
A4 (210x297 mm)
●
A5 (148x210 mm)
●
B5 (257x182 mm)
●
16k (197x273 mm)
●
DPostcard JIS (148x200 mm)
4.
Touch the Save button.
Image adjustment
1.
From the Home screen, scroll to and touch the Administration button.
2.
Open the following menus:
●
Fax Settings
●
Fax Send Settings
●
Default Job Options
●
Image Adjustment
3.
Touch the Lighter or Darker buttons to adjust the Darkness setting.
4.
Touch the Less or More buttons to adjust the Contrast , Background Cleanup , or Sharpness settings.
5.
Touch the Save button.
NOTE:
Touch the Default button to reset the sharpness setting to the factory setting.
Optimize text/picture
Use the Optimize text/picture feature to produce fax output that best matches the original. Sending graphics and photos in text mode results in lower quality images.
1.
From the Home screen, scroll to and touch the Administration button.
2.
Open the following menus:
●
Fax Settings
●
Fax Send Settings
●
Default Job Options
●
Optimize Text/Picture
3.
Touch one of the following options:
●
Manually adjust (default)
●
Text
224 Chapter 12 Fax ENWW
●
Printed picture
●
Photograph
4.
Touch the Save button.
Job build
Use the Job build feature to combine multiple originals into a single fax job.
1.
From the Home screen, scroll to and touch the Administration button.
2.
Open the following menus:
●
Fax Settings
●
Fax Send Settings
●
Default Job Options
●
Job Build
3.
Touch one of the following options:
●
Job Build off (default)
●
Job Build on
4.
Touch the Save button.
Blank page suppression
Use the Blank page suppression feature to prevent blank pages in a fax from being printed.
1.
From the Home screen, scroll to and touch the Administration button.
2.
Open the following menus:
●
Fax Settings
●
Fax Send Settings
●
Default Job Options
●
Blank Page Suppression
3.
Touch one of the following options:
●
Disabled (default)
●
Enabled
4.
Touch the Save button.
ENWW
Set fax settings
225
Receive fax settings
Fax receive setup
Set the ringer volume
1.
From the Home screen, scroll to and touch the Administration button.
2.
Open the following menus:
●
Fax Settings
●
Fax Receive Settings
●
Fax Receive Setup
3.
Touch the Ringer Volume drop down menu and then select one of the following ringer volume settings:
●
Off
●
Low (default)
●
High
4.
Touch the Save button to save the ringer volume setting.
Set rings-to-answer
The rings-to-answer setting determines the number of times the phone rings before the call is answered by the fax accessory.
NOTE:
The default setting range for rings-to-answer is country/region-specific. The range of possible rings-to-answer is limited by country/region.
1.
From the Home screen, scroll to and touch the Administration button.
2.
Open the following menus:
●
Fax Settings
●
Fax Receive Settings
●
Fax Receive Setup
3.
Touch the Rings To Answer drop-down menu and then touch the number of rings (1–5, the default is 1).
4.
Touch the Save button.
226 Chapter 12 Fax ENWW
Set fax receive speed
1.
From the Home screen, scroll to and touch the Administration button.
2.
Open the following menus:
●
Fax Settings
●
Fax Receive Settings
●
Fax Receive Setup
3.
Touch one of the following options from the Fax Receive Speed drop down menu:
●
Fast (default) — v.34/max 33,600 bps
●
Medium — v.17/max 14,600 bps
●
Slow — v.29/max 9600 bps
4.
Touch the Save button.
Set ring interval
1.
From the Home screen, scroll to and touch the Administration button.
2.
Open the following menus:
●
Fax Settings
●
Fax Receive Settings
●
Fax Receive Setup
3.
Touch the box beneath the Ring Interval heading to open the keypad.
4.
Enter a value for the ring interval on the keypad, and then touch the OK button. The default setting for ring interval is 600.
5.
Touch the Save button.
Set ring frequency
1.
From the Home screen, scroll to and touch the Administration button.
2.
Open the following menus:
●
Fax Settings
●
Fax Receive Settings
●
Fax Receive Setup
3.
Touch the box beneath the Ring Frequency heading to open the keypad.
ENWW
Set fax settings
227
4.
Enter a value for the ring frequency on the keypad, and then touch the OK button. The default setting for ring frequency is 68 hz.
5.
Touch the Save button.
Enable or disable the fax printing schedule
NOTE:
Before enabling a fax-printing schedule, a schedule must be created.
1.
From the Home screen, scroll to and touch the Administration button.
2.
Open the following menus:
●
Fax Settings
●
Fax Receive Settings
●
Fax Printing Schedule
3.
Touch the Use Fax Printing Schedule option.
4.
Touch the Schedule button.
5.
Touch Fax Printing Mode .
6.
Touch the green plus sign to open the Schedule a Weekly Fax Event screen.
7.
Select an option under the Event Type heading:
●
Print incoming faxes
●
Store incoming faxes
8.
Touch the Time fields to open the keypad and then enter the hour and minute values when incoming faxes will be printed or stored.
9.
Touch the Event Days buttons for the days to apply the fax printing schedule.
10.
Touch the OK button.
11.
Touch the Save button to save the fax printing schedule.
12.
Touch the Save button to enable fax printing schedule.
NOTE:
Only one fax printing schedule can be applied per day.
Block incoming faxes
Use the fax block list setting to create a list of blocked phone numbers. When a fax is received from a blocked phone number, the fax is not printed and is immediately deleted from memory.
228 Chapter 12 Fax ENWW
Create a blocked-fax list
1.
From the Home screen, scroll to and touch the Administration button.
2.
Open the following menus:
●
Fax Settings
●
Fax Receive Settings
●
Blocked Fax Numbers
3.
Touch the Fax Number to Block text box to display the keyboard.
4.
Type a number and then touch the OK button.
5.
Touch the green arrow to move the number to the Blocked Fax Numbers list.
NOTE:
To add additional blocked fax numbers, repeat steps 3 through 5.
6.
Touch the Save button to save the blocked fax numbers list.
Delete numbers from the blocked-fax list
1.
From the Home screen, scroll to and touch the Administration button.
2.
Open the following menus:
●
Fax Settings
●
Fax Receive Settings
●
Blocked Fax Numbers
3.
Touch the number to be deleted from the Blocked Fax Numbers list, touch the Delete button, and then touch the Save button.
4.
Touch the OK button to confirm the deletion of the number.
5.
Repeat steps 3 and 4 to delete more numbers from the Blocked Fax Numbers list, or touch the
Delete All button, and then touch the Save button, to delete all numbers from the Blocked Fax
Numbers list at once.
Initiate polling receive
Some fax machines can hold a fax until another fax machine requests that the fax be sent. When a product polls another fax machine that is holding a fax and requests that the held fax be sent to the product, this is known as polling receive.
1.
On the control panel, touch the Fax icon to display the Fax screen.
2.
Touch More Options to display the options screen.
3.
Scroll to page 3.
4.
Touch Fax Polling to display the Fax Polling screen.
ENWW
Set fax settings
229
5.
Touch the text box to display the keyboard.
6.
Using the keypad, type a polling receive number, and then touch Start .
7.
The number entered is dialed. If a stored fax is being held at the fax machine dialed, that fax is transmitted to the product and printed. If no fax is held, a No Fax is Available message will be displayed. If the fax machine does not support the polling feature, a Poll Invalid error message will be shown.
Default job options
The following default job options are available for configuration:
●
Notification
●
Stamp Received Faxes
●
Fit to Page
●
Paper Selection
●
Output Bin
●
Sides
NOTE:
Default job option settings are shared across all fax methods; analog, LAN, and internet fax.
Notification
This setting controls when the fax call report is printed for incoming faxes.
1.
From the Home screen, scroll to and touch the Administration button.
2.
Open the following menus:
●
Fax Settings
●
Fax Receive Settings
●
Default Job Options
●
Notification
3.
Touch one of the following notification settings:
●
Do not notify (default)
●
Notify when job completes
●
Notify only if job fails
4.
Touch the Print option to receive a printed notification, or touch the E-mail option to receive an email notification.
5.
If you selected the Print option, touch the Save button to complete the notification setup.
-or-
230 Chapter 12 Fax ENWW
If you selected the E-mail option, use the keyboard to type an e-mail address. Then touch the Save button to complete the notification setup.
6.
Touch the Include Thumbnail check box to include a thumbnail image with notifications.
Stamp received faxes (incoming faxes)
The stamp received faxes setting enables or disables stamping incoming faxes. The stamp prints the date, time, phone number, and page number on each incoming page.
1.
From the Home screen, scroll to and touch the Administration button.
2.
Open the following menus:
●
Fax Settings
●
Fax Receive Settings
●
Default Job Options
●
Stamp Received Faxes
3.
Touch the Disabled option (default) to disable the stamp, or touch the Enabled option to enable the stamp.
4.
Touch the Save button.
Set fit-to-page
When selecting a page size to print a fax, the product determines the closest page size that matches the intended size from sizes available in the product. If the fit-to-page setting is enabled and the received image is larger than that page size, the product attempts to scale the image to fit the page. If this setting is disabled, an incoming image larger than the page splits across pages.
1.
From the Home screen, scroll to and touch the Administration button.
2.
Open the following menus:
●
Fax Settings
●
Fax Receive Settings
●
Default Job Options
●
Fit to Page
3.
Touch the Enabled option (default) to enable fit-to-page, or touch the Disabled option to disable fitto-page.
4.
Touch the Save button.
ENWW
Set fax settings
231
Set the paper selection
Use the paper selection feature to specify which tray the paper for the fax is loaded from.
1.
From the Home screen, scroll to and touch the Administration button.
2.
Open the following menus:
●
Fax Settings
●
Fax Receive Settings
●
Default Job Options
●
Paper Selection
3.
Touch one of the following options:
●
Automatic (default)
●
Tray 1
●
Tray 2
●
Tray 3
●
Tray 4
●
Tray 5
4.
Touch the Save button.
Set the output bin
Use the Output bin feature to set which output bin to use for outputting the fax.
1.
From the Home screen, scroll to and touch the Administration button.
2.
Open the following menus:
●
Fax Settings
●
Fax Receive Settings
●
Default Job Options
●
Output Bin
3.
Touch the bin to use for your received faxes.
4.
Touch the Save button.
232 Chapter 12 Fax ENWW
Set the sides
Use the Sides feature to specify 1–side or 2–sided ouput for faxes.
1.
From the Home screen, scroll to and touch the Administration button.
2.
Open the following menus:
●
Fax Settings
●
Fax Receive Settings
●
Default Job Options
●
Sides
3.
Touch one of the following options:
●
1-sided (default)
●
2-sided
4.
Touch the Save button.
Set the paper tray
The paper tray setting selects the product paper tray to pull paper from for printing faxes.
1.
From the Home screen, scroll to and touch the Administration button.
2.
Open the following menus:
●
Fax Settings
●
Fax Receive Settings
●
Default Job Options
●
Paper Selection
3.
Touch the name of the tray to use for received faxes.
4.
Touch the Save button to save the paper tray selection value.
Fax archive and forwarding
Use the fax archive feature to save archival copies of all incoming faxes, all outgoing faxes, or both, to a specified email address.
Use the fax forwarding feature to forward all received faxes, all outgoing faxes, or both, to another fax number. When fax forwarding is enabled, the receiving product prints the fax (if fax printing is disabled, the fax prints when the printing is enabled), and also forwards the fax to the fax forward number.
ENWW
Set fax settings
233
NOTE:
To use the Archive to Email Address feature, the SMTP server must be configured, and responding, on the product. For information about configuring the SMTP server, see the product user guide.
Enable fax archiving
1.
From the Home screen, scroll to and touch the Administration button.
2.
Open the following menus:
●
Fax Settings
●
Fax Archive and Forwarding
3.
Touch the Enable Fax Archiving box.
4.
Select one of the following choices from the Type of Fax Job to Archive drop down menu:
●
Send and receive (default)
●
Send only
●
Receive only
5.
Touch the Fax Archiving E-mail Address text box to open the keypad.
6.
Type the email address where faxes will be forwarded, and then touch the OK button.
7.
Touch the Save button.
Enable fax forwarding
1.
From the Home screen, scroll to and touch the Administration button.
2.
Open the following menus:
●
Fax Settings
●
Fax Archive and Forwarding
3.
Touch the Enable Fax Forwarding box.
4.
Select one of the following choices from the Type of Fax Job to Forward drop down menu:
●
Send and receive
●
Send only
●
Receive only (default)
5.
Touch the Fax Forwarding Number text box to open the keypad.
6.
Type the number where faxes will be forwarded, and then touch the OK button.
7.
Touch the Save button.
234 Chapter 12 Fax ENWW
Use Fax
Fax feature screen
The Fax feature screen is used to send faxes. To access this screen, press the Fax icon displayed on the control panel Home screen.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
17
16
10
11
12
10
11
12
13
8
9
6
7
14
15
16
17
1
4
5
2
3
15 14 13
Home Key - return to main screen
Send Fax - press to send fax to recipients
Backspace/Delete Number
Enter Number into Recipient List
Status Message Bar
Access fax address book
Speed Dial Search by Number
Image Preview
Help - touch to display help selections
Speed Dial - Edit Key
Speed Dial - Search by Name
Speed Dial List (scroll to display other entries)
More Options – touch to view or set other fax sending options.
Press for Details of Selected Recipient
Press to Delete Selected Recipient from List
Fax Recipients
Fax Number - Touch for keyboard or enter from control panel keypad
1
ENWW
Use Fax
235
1
When the Fax Number is touched, a pop up is displayed which includes the PIN button for adding special character brackets ([ ]) to hide a PIN, and a Pause button to insert a comma for a two second pause.
NOTE:
The PIN is for calling card numbers, not for the security of faxed documents.
Status message bar
While sending and receiving faxes, status information will display in the status bar located at the top of some touch screens. This status includes such information as: Ready, Receiving call, Page sent, and others.
Send a fax
To send a fax, you can use one of three basic methods to enter numbers:
●
Enter numbers manually.
●
Enter numbers using speed dial.
●
Enter numbers using the fax address book.
NOTE:
For online information about sending a fax, touch ?
on the screen to access the help menu, and then touch the Fax menu under the list of help topics.
Allowable characters in fax numbers
●
Digits (0–9)
●
#
●
*
●
,
● spaces
●
[]
●
()
236 Chapter 12 Fax ENWW
●
–
●
+
●
X
●
P
When entering a phone number from the numeric keypad, include any pauses or other numbers, such as area codes, access codes for numbers outside a PBX system (usually a 9 or 0), or a long-distance prefix. A two second pause may be included by typing a comma (,). If the fax prefix setting has been set to automatically include the dialing prefix, you will not need to enter it.
NOTE:
When a fax is sent, it is first scanned and stored into memory. After the entire document is stored, it is sent and then deleted from memory. Faxes that fail to send, because the number was busy or did not answer, are deleted from memory. If the Redial On Busy or Redial On No Answer features are set, the fax will not be deleted until all retries fail or the fax is sent successfully.
Send a fax by entering numbers manually
1.
Place the document in the automatic document feeder (ADF) or on the scanner glass.
2.
From the Home screen, touch the Fax button.
You may be prompted to type a user name and password.
3.
Touch the More Options button. Verify that the settings match those of your original. When all settings are completed, touch the up arrow to scroll to the main Fax screen.
ENWW
Use Fax
237
4.
Touch the Fax Number box to open the keypad.
5.
Using the keypad, enter a phone number and then touch the OK button.
6.
Touch the Start icon to send the fax. You can either touch the Start icon on the touch screen or press the green Start button on the control panel.
Send a fax using speed dial
NOTE:
Prior to sending a fax using speed dial, you must create a speed dial.
1.
Place the document in the automatic document feeder (ADF) or on the scanner glass.
2.
From the Home screen, touch the Fax button.
3.
Touch a Speed Dial number for the speed dial name you wish to use and then touch the OK button. The speed dial name will appear in the Fax Number section of the Fax screen.
4.
Touch the Start button to send the fax. You can either touch the Start button on the touch screen or press the green Start button on the control panel.
Search a speed-dial list by name
Use this feature to search an existing speed dial by name.
NOTE:
If you do not know the unique name of the speed dial, type a letter to select any portion of the list. For example, to view speed-dial names that begin with the letter N, type the letter N. If no matching entries exist, a message appears before the search shows the entry that is closest to the letter N.
238 Chapter 12 Fax ENWW
1.
From the Home screen, touch the Fax button.
2.
Touch the Speed Dial Search button. This button looks like a magnifying glass and is located to the right of the Speed Dial button.
3.
Type the first letters of the speed dial name to search for. As matches are found, the list at the top of the search screen is populated. If necessary, scroll to see all the entries, or type more letters to narrow the search.
4.
Select the appropriate name from the list and touch the OK button. The speed-dial list on the main fax screen shows the selected entry within the list of numbers.
5.
Touch a speed dial number to add it to the recipients list.
6.
Select or search for additional names as needed.
Send a fax by using fax address book numbers
The fax address book feature allows you to store fax numbers on the product.
Your Microsoft® Exchange contact list may also be enabled on the product to appear in the fax address book.
1.
On the control panel, touch the Fax icon to display the Fax screen.
2.
Touch the Address Book icon to display the Address Book screen.
3.
Select a fax address book source from the drop down menu.
4.
Touch the names to highlight and then touch the right arrow icon to move the highlighted names to the Fax Recipients section.
ENWW
Use Fax
239
5.
Touch the OK button to return to the Fax screen.
6.
Touch the Start button to send the fax. You can either touch the Start button on the touch screen or press the green Start button on the control panel.
Fax address book search
Use the fax address book search feature to complete a name search of the address book.
1.
Touch the Fax icon on the Home screen.
2.
Touch the fax address book icon (located to the right of the fax recipients box).
3.
Select the All Contacts or Local Contacts choice in the drop down menu at the top of the fax address book screen.
4.
Touch the Search icon (magnifying glass) next to the drop down menu.
5.
On the keyboard, type the first letter or letters of the name; matching recipients appear as letters are typed. Type more letters to further refine the search. Select from the name(s) found at the top of the screen, and then touch OK . The screen returns to the Fax fax address book.
6.
Touch the right arrow to enter the selected name into the Fax Recipients list.
7.
Touch the OK button to return to the Send Fax job screen.
NOTE:
To import/export the local fax fax address book to the EWS, refer to the EWS documentation.
Cancel a fax
Cancel the current fax transmission
▲
Touch the Cancel Job button on the fax Status screen.
-or-
On the control panel, touch the red Stop button.
Touch the OK button when the message Job has been aborted. displays.
Touch the OK button to finish canceling the fax job and return to the fax screen.
Cancel pending faxes
1.
From the Home screen, scroll to and touch the Job Status button.
2.
Touch the fax job to cancel on the Job Status screen.
3.
Touch the Cancel Job button.
4.
Touch the Yes button on the screen with the message Are you sure you want to cancel this
job? displays.
240 Chapter 12 Fax ENWW
NOTE:
The cancel operation may require up to 30 seconds to complete.
Receive faxes
When the fax accessory receives incoming faxes, it stores them in memory before printing. After the entire fax is stored, it is printed and then deleted from memory. Faxes print when received unless
Schedule Printing of Faxes is enabled. If Schedule Printing of Faxes is enabled, all incoming faxes are stored in memory and not printed. When Schedule Printing of Faxes is disabled, all stored faxes print.
You can change the fax-receive default settings to modify the way a fax is received. These settings include the following options:
●
Selecting the number of rings-to-answer
●
Printing date, time, and page number on faxes (stamp)
●
Selecting input paper tray and destination bin
●
Forwarding faxes to another number
●
Blocking faxes from certain numbers
●
Schedule the printing of faxes (memory lock)
●
Notification settings
Create or delete speed dial lists
Speed dial allows you to assign a speed dial name to a single number or a group of numbers and then send a fax to that number or numbers by selecting the speed dial name.
Create a speed dial list
1.
From the Home screen, scroll to and touch the
Fax button.
2.
Touch the Speed Dials button to display the
Speed Dial screen.
ENWW
Use Fax
241
3.
Touch a Speed Dial Number .
4.
Touch the Speed Dial Name box to display the keyboard.
5.
Type a name for the speed dial.
6.
Touch the down arrow on the Speed Dial
Name box to open the drop down menu.
7.
Touch the Fax Number option.
8.
Type a fax number for the Speed Dial Name .
NOTE:
To enter additional fax numbers for a speed dial name, touch the screen to the right of the last digit of the previously entered fax number. When the cursor appears, touch the enter key to move the cursor to the next line.
Repeat this step to enter all the numbers for the speed dial name.
242 Chapter 12 Fax ENWW
9.
Touch the OK button. The name and fax number (or numbers) will appear next to the
Speed Dial Number .
10.
When finished, press the OK button to return to the Fax screen
Delete a speed dial list
1.
From the Home screen, scroll to and touch the
Fax button.
2.
Touch the Speed Dials button to display the
Speed Dial screen.
3.
Touch a Speed Dials number of the list to be deleted.
ENWW
Use Fax
243
4.
Touch the Delete button.
5.
Touch the Yes button to confirm the deletion of the speed dial list and to return to the Fax screen.
Delete a single number from the speed dial list
1.
From the Home screen, scroll to and touch the
Fax button.
2.
Touch the Speed Dials button to display the
Speed Dial screen.
3.
Touch the Speed Dial number of the list to open the keyboard.
4.
Touch the down arrow on the Speed Dial
Name box to open the drop down menu and then touch the Fax Numbers option.
244 Chapter 12 Fax ENWW
5.
Scroll through the list of fax numbers and touch the screen to the right of last digit of the fax number to be deleted. Use the backspace key to delete the fax number.
6.
Touch the OK button to return to the Speed
Dials screen.
7.
Touch the OK button to return to the Fax screen.
Add a number to an existing speed dial list
1.
From the Home screen, scroll to and touch the
Fax button.
2.
Touch the Speed Dials button to display the
Speed Dial screen.
3.
Touch the Speed Dial number of the list to be edited.
ENWW
Use Fax
245
4.
Touch the down arrow on the Speed Dial
Name box to open the drop down menu.
5.
Touch the Fax Numbers item.
6.
To add a fax number for a speed dial name, touch the screen to the right of the last digit of the last fax number in the list. When the cursor appears, touch the enter key to move the cursor to the next line and then type the fax number.
7.
Touch the OK button to return to the Speed
Dials screen.
8.
Touch the OK button to return to the Fax screen.
Voice Calls and Retries
Fax Call Report
A Fax Call Report is printed when the Notification feature has been enabled in the Default Job Options or More Options menu.
When all fax attempts have been exhausted, a Fax Call Report will be printed for a fax send. It shows the fax job log ID. The result of the final attempt is printed on the Fax Call Report.
246 Chapter 12 Fax ENWW
A Fax Call Report does not print for voice calls.
NOTE:
A Fax Call Report only generates Job numbers for final attempts. If one of these reports is printed manually from the menu and the last call was neither the final attempt nor a Voice call the Job number will be zero.
Fax Activity Log
Voice Calls are not included in the Fax Activity Log by default. Only the final attempt, after all redials are used or the fax is a success, is listed in the Fax Activity Log.
T.30 Report
Voice Calls do not cause a T.30 report to print. All retry attempts cause a T.30 report to print.
Scheduling fax printing (memory lock)
Use the fax scheduling feature to specify when faxes print. The following fax printing modes can be selected:
●
Store all received faxes
●
Print all received faxes
●
Use Fax Printing Schedule
If the Store all received faxes feature is selected, then all incoming faxes will be stored in memory and not printed. It is possible to access fax jobs stored in memory through the Open from Device Memory menu. Using this menu, you can print or delete print jobs while they are stored in memory. For additional information about this feature, see the Retrieve Job menu description in the product user guide.
NOTE:
Retrieved stored faxes can be accessed by entering the Fax Printing menu and changing to the Print all received faxes mode.
If the Print all received faxes mode is selected, then all incoming faxes will be printed. Any faxes that are currently stored in memory will also be printed.
If the Use Fax Printing Schedule mode is selected, then faxes will be only printed per the fax printing schedule. The fax printing schedule can be set to lockout an entire day (24 hours) or lockout a time period during the day. Only one lockout period can be set, but it can be applied to any number of days. The lockout period is setup under the Fax Printing Schedule menu.
Adding only one type of event into the schedule would make the product behave as Store All
Received Faxes or Print All Received Faxes based on the type of single event added i.e. Single
Store Event would cause device to Store All Received Faxes and Single Print Event would cause
Print All Received Faxes.
NOTE:
When the lockout time ends, any faxes that were received and stored during the lockout period are printed automatically.
ENWW
Use Fax
247
Use Fax over VoIP networks
VoIP technology converts the analog phone signal into digital bits. These are then assembled into packets which travel on the Internet. The packets are converted and transmitted back to analog signals at or near the destination.
The transmission of the information on the Internet is done digitally instead of analog. Therefore, there are different constraints on the fax transmission that may require different fax settings than the analog
Public Switched Telephone Network (PSTN). Fax is very dependent upon timing and signal quality, so a fax transmission is more sensitive to a VoIP environment.
The following are suggested changes in settings for the HP LaserJet Analog Fax Accessory
500 when it is connected to a VoIP service:
●
Start off with the fax set in V.34 (Fast) mode and with Error Correction Mode (ECM) turned on.
The V.34 protocol handles any changes in transmission speed needed to accommodate VoIP networks.
●
If numerous errors or retries occur with the unit set to V.34, set V.34 Off and set speed to Medium
(14,400 bps).
●
If errors and retries persist, set a lower fax speed as some VoIP systems cannot handle the higher signal rates associated with fax. Set the Maximum Baud Rate to 9,600 bps (Slow).
●
In rare cases, if errors persist, turn off ECM on the product. The image quality might decrease.
Ensure that the image quality is acceptable with ECM off before using this setting.
●
If the preceding setting changes have not improved the VoIP fax reliability, contact your VoIP provider for help.
248 Chapter 12 Fax ENWW
Solve fax problems
Is your fax set up correctly?
Use the following checklist to help identify the cause of any fax related problems you are encountering:
●
Are you using the phone cord supplied with the fax accessory? This fax accessory has been tested with the supplied phone cord to meet RJ11 and functional specifications. Do not substitute another phone cord; the analog-fax accessory requires an analog phone cord. It also requires an analog phone connection.
●
Is the fax/phone line connector seated in the socket on the fax accessory? Make sure that the phone jack is well seated in the socket. The connector should be inserted into the socket until it "clicks."
●
Is the phone wall jack working properly? Verify that a dial tone exists by attaching a phone to the wall jack. Can you hear a dial tone, and can you make a phone call?
What type of phone line are you using?
●
Dedicated line: A standard fax/phone number assigned to receive or send faxes.
NOTE:
The phone line should be for product fax use only and not shared with other types of telephone devices. Examples include alarm systems that use the phone line for notifications to a monitoring companies.
●
PBX system: A business-environment phone system. Standard home phones and the fax accessory use an analog phone signal. Some PBX systems are digital and might not be compatible with the fax accessory. You need to have access to a standard analog phone line to be able to send and receive faxes.
●
Roll-over lines: A phone system feature where a new call "rolls over" to the next available line when the first incoming line is busy. Try attaching the fax accessory to the first incoming phone line. The fax accessory will answer the phone after it rings the number of times set in the rings-toanswer setting.
NOTE:
Roll-over lines can cause problems with the fax accessory's ability to receive faxes. Using rollover lines with this product is not recommended.
Are you using a surge-protection device?
A surge-protection device can be used between the wall jack and the fax accessory to protect the fax accessory against electrical power passed through the phone lines. These devices can cause some fax communication problems by degrading the quality of the phone signal. If you are having problems sending or receiving faxes and are using one of these devices, connect the fax accessory directly to the phone jack on the wall to determine whether the problem is with the surge-protection device.
ENWW
Solve fax problems
249
Are you using a phone company voice-messaging service or an answering machine?
If the rings-to-answer setting for the messaging service is lower than the rings-to-answer setting for the fax accessory, the messaging service answers the call, and the fax accessory is not able to receive faxes. If the rings-to-answer setting for the fax accessory is lower than that of the messaging service, the fax accessory answers all calls, and no calls are routed to the messaging service.
Does your phone line have a call-waiting feature?
If the fax telephone line has an activated call-waiting feature, a call-waiting notice can interrupt a fax call in progress, which causes a communication error. Ensure that a call-waiting feature is not active on the fax telephone line.
Check fax accessory status
If the analog-fax accessory does not appear to be functioning, print a Configuration page report to check the status.
1.
From the Home screen, scroll to and touch the Administration button.
2.
Open the following menus:
●
Reports
●
Configuration/Status Pages
●
Configuration page
3.
Touch the Print button to print the report, or touch the View button to view the report on the screen.
The report consists of several pages.
NOTE:
The product IP address or host name is listed on the Jetdirect Page.
On the Fax Accessory Page of the Configuration Page, under the Hardware Information heading, check the Modem Status. The following table identifies the status conditions and possible solutions.
Operational / Enabled
Operational / Disabled
Non-Operational / Enabled/Disabled
The analog-fax accessory is installed and ready.
The fax accessory is installed and operational, however,
HP Digital Sending utility has either disabled the product fax feature or has enabled LAN fax. When LAN fax is enabled, the analog-fax feature is disabled. Only one fax feature, either
LAN fax or analog fax, can be enabled at a time.
A firmware failure has been identified. The firmware should be updated.
1
Fax accessory has failed; reseat the fax accessory card and check for bent pins. If the status is still DAMAGED, replace the analog-fax accessory card.
ENABLED indicates that the analog fax accessory is enabled, turned on; DISABLED indicates that LAN fax is enabled (analog fax is turned off).
250 Chapter 12 Fax ENWW
Fax feature is not operating
The fax accessory is installed but the icon does not appear on the product main screen.
Cause Solution
HP MFP Digital Sending Software Configuration utility has disabled the analog-fax feature.
The accessory is not operating correctly.
Faulty formatter board.
Use the HP MFP Digital Sending Software Configuration utility to enable the analog-fax feature.
Check the fax accessory status. If the status is
NON-OPERATIONAL, new firmware might need to be installed.
If the status is DAMAGED and you just installed the card, try reseating the card and check for bent pins.
If the status is DAMAGED and the card is installed correctly, the card might need to be replaced.
Contact your HP service representative for service.
The product is not displaying the fax menus.
Cause
LAN fax is enabled.
Solution
This is normal operation. When the HP Digital Sending
Software enables LAN fax, the analog fax is disabled and the fax menu, which is used for the analog fax only, does not open.
General fax problems
Problem
Fax failed to send.
An "Out of Memory" status message appears on the status message bar.
Print quality of a photo is poor or prints as a gray box.
Pressed the Cancel button on the product keyboard to cancel a fax transmission and the fax was still sent.
No fax address book button appears.
Cause
JBIG is enabled and receiving fax does not have JBIG capability.
The product storage disk is full.
Solution
Set JBIG off.
Wrong Page Content mode setting.
Delete some files from the disk, see the product user guide for information about managing the disk.
Try setting the Optimize Text/Picture option to Photograph .
Cancel faxes using the fax menu.
Cancellation takes place after making a selection in the cancellation menu
(displayed after pressing red Stop button) and acknowledging with OK .
The fax address book feature has not been enabled.
Use the HP MFP Digital Sending
Software Configuration utility to enable the fax address book feature.
ENWW
Solve fax problems
251
Problem
Not able to locate the Fax settings in
HP Web Jetadmin.
The header is being appended to the top of the page when I have overlay enabled.
Have a mix of names and numbers in the recipients box.
My one page fax prints as two pages.
Document stops feeding in the middle of faxing.
The volume for sounds coming from the fax accessory is too high or too low.
Cause Solution
Fax settings in HP Web Jetadmin are located under the device's status page drop-down menu.
The fax will append the overlay header to the top of a page when overlay is set, when the fax has been forwarded.
This is normal for both names and numbers to appear, depending on where they are from, the fax address book lists names, and all other databases list numbers.
Select Digital Sending and Fax from the drop-down menu.
This is normal operation.
Normal, no action required.
The fax header is being appended to the top of the fax, pushing text to a second page.
If you want your one page fax to print on one page, set the overlay header to overlay mode or adjust the Fit to page setting.
There might be a jam in the ADF.
The volume setting needs to be adjusted.
If there is a jam, see the product user guide for instructions on clearing jams.
Problems with receiving faxes
Incoming fax calls are not being answered by the fax accessory (no fax detected).
Cause Solution
The rings-to-answer setting might not be set correctly.
The phone cord might not be connected properly, or the phone cord is not working.
The phone line might not be working.
A voice-messaging service might be interfering with the fax accessory's ability to answer calls.
Check the rings-to-answer setting.
Check the installation. Make sure you are using the phone cord that came with the fax accessory.
Disconnect the fax accessory from the phone jack, and connect a phone. Try to make a phone call to ensure the phone line is working.
Do one of the following:
●
Discontinue the messaging service.
●
Get a phone line dedicated to fax calls.
●
Decrease the rings-to-answer for the fax accessory to a number less than the rings-to-answer for the voice mail.
Faxes are transmitting or being received very slowly.
Cause Solution
You might be sending or receiving a very complex fax, such as one with many graphics.
Complex faxes take longer to be sent or received.
252 Chapter 12 Fax ENWW
Faxes are transmitting or being received very slowly.
Cause Solution
The receiving fax machine might have a slow modem speed.
The fax accessory only sends the fax at the fastest modem speed the receiving fax machine can use.
The resolution at which the fax was sent or is being received is very high. A higher resolution typically results in better quality, but also requires a longer transmission time.
If there is a poor phone-line connection, the fax accessory and the receiving fax machine slow down the transmission to adjust for errors.
If you are receiving the fax, call and ask the sender to decrease the resolution and resend the fax. If you are sending, decrease the resolution and change the Optimize
Text/Picture option.
Cancel and resend the fax. Have the phone company check the phone line.
Faxes are not printing on the product.
Cause Solution
There is no media in the media input tray.
Schedule Printing of Faxes is set.
The product is either low on toner or has run out of toner.
Incoming call may be a voice call.
The incoming fax was interrupted.
Load media. Any faxes received while the input tray is empty are stored and will print after the tray has been refilled.
If Schedule Printing of Faxes is enabled, faxes will not print until it is disabled.
The product stops printing as soon as it is low on toner or runs out of toner. Any faxes received are stored in memory and print after the toner has been replaced. For other product printing problems, see the product user guide.
Incoming voice calls usually show up in the call report as a
Communication Error (17) As these are voice calls and not a fax error, no action is needed to be taken. Ensure that those calling you have a voice number that is different from the fax number.
Verify that the fax telephone line does not have an activated call-waiting feature. A call-waiting notice can interrupt a fax call in progress, which causes a communication error.
The Fax Printing Schedule feature is set to Always store faxes .
Change the Fax Printing Schedule setting to Always print faxes .
Problems with sending faxes
Problem
Faxes quit during sending.
Cause
The fax machine to which you are sending might be malfunctioning.
Your phone line might not be working.
Solution
Try sending to another fax machine.
Disconnect the fax accessory from the phone jack, and connect a phone. Try to make a phone call to ensure the phone line is working.
ENWW
Solve fax problems
253
Problem
The fax accessory is receiving faxes but is not sending them.
Outgoing fax calls keep dialing.
Faxes you send are not arriving at the receiving fax machine.
Cause Solution
Your phone line might be noisy or poor quality
A call-waiting feature might be active
Try using a lower baud rate to improve the reliability of transmission. See maximum baud rate setting.
Verify that the fax telephone line does not have an activated call-waiting feature. A call-waiting notice can interrupt a fax call in progress, which causes a communication error.
Disable the detect dial tone setting.
If the fax accessory is on a PBX system, the PBX system might be generating a dial tone the fax accessory cannot detect.
There might be a poor phone connection.
The fax machine to which you are sending might be malfunctioning.
Try again later.
Try sending to another fax machine.
Your phone line might not be working.
Disconnect the fax accessory from the phone jack, and connect a phone. Try to make a phone call to ensure the phone line is working.
The fax accessory automatically redials a fax number if the Redial on Busy option is set to on or if the Redial On No
Answer is set on.
This is normal operation. If you do not want the fax to retry, set Redial on Busy to 0 and set Redial On No Answer to 0.
The receiving fax machine might be turned off or might have an error condition, such as being out of paper.
A fax might be in memory because it is waiting to redial a busy number, or there are other jobs ahead of it waiting to be sent.
Call the recipient to make sure the fax machine is turned on and ready to receive faxes.
If a fax job is in memory for either of these reasons, an entry for the job appears in the fax log. Print the fax activity log, and check the Result column for jobs with a Pending designation.
Error codes
If a fax problem occurs which prevents or interrupts sending or receiving of a fax, an error code is generated that will help in determining the cause of the problem. Error codes show up in the fax activity log, the fax call report, and the T.30 Protocol Trace. Print one of these three reports to obtain the error code. A detailed description of the error codes and the appropriate action can be found at www.hp.com
by searching for HP LaserJet Analog Fax Accessory 500.
Fax error messages
When an analog fax is sent or received on an HP LaserJet product, any errors that occur during the fax process will be displayed on the product control panel and entered into the fax reports. Fax errors can occur for many reasons and often they are due to interruptions or noise on the telephone connection.
254 Chapter 12 Fax ENWW
ENWW
Any error that takes place during the fax process regardless of where it originates will be displayed by the product.
If the fax process is interrupted or an error occurs during a fax transmission or reception, a two part status/error description is generated by the fax subsystem on the product. Normal or successful faxes also generate messages indicating success. The message information consists of a text description and a numeric code (a few messages don’t include numeric codes). Only the text part of the message will be displayed on the product control panel; however, both the text message and numeric code will be listed in the Fax Activity Report, Fax Call Report, and the Fax T.30 Trace (these fax reports can be printed out individually from the product control panel – under the Administration > Reports > Fax
Reports and Administration > Troubleshooting > Fax > Fax T.30 Trace menus). The numeric code is shown in parentheses after the text part of the message in the reports. For example, if a communication error occurred, the control panel display would show Fax Failed: Communication Error . The same error would be shown in the Result field in the Fax Activity Report as Communication Error (17). For this example, the numeric code associated with this communication error is ‘17’.
The numeric code is generated by the fax modem. Usually a numeric code of (0) indicates a normal modem response. Some messages will always display a numeric code of (0), whereas other messages can have a range of numeric codes depending on the circumstances, and a few messages will have no numeric code. Usually a numeric code of (0) indicates an error was not associated with the fax modem, but occurred in another part of the fax subsystem or other product subsytem such as the printing subsystem. Non-zero error codes give further detail into the particular action or process that the modem is executing, and they don’t necessarily indicate that there is a problem with the modem.
In the tables that follow, the fax messages with the most common number codes are given with recommended corrective action. Several messages that are normal or indicate a normal event are also included in tables. For example, if a fax was not able to be sent to a busy number, a Fail Busy message will be shown. Nothing is wrong with the fax subsystem; the message indicates the fax was not completed due to a busy telephone number at the receiving end.
Persistent error messages with numeric codes different than those listed here require assistance of customer support. A more detailed listing of the last fax call can be printed out before contacting customer support to help identify the problem. The detailed fax listing is called a Fax T.30 Trace and can be printed for the last fax, or it can be set to print whenever a fax error occurs. To print or configure the Fax T.30 Trace, touch Administration , Troubleshooting , and then Fax T.30 Trace . You can then print the report for the last fax or configure when to print the T.30 trace.
Solve fax problems 255
Send-fax messages
Table 12-1 Send-fax messages
Message Error No.
Cancelled
Success
Fail Busy
No Answer
Compression Error
No Dial
Modem Fail
Communication Error
Communication Error
Space Fail
Page Fail
Memory Error
Job Fail
0 n/a
0
Any
0
Any
0
0
Any
0
17 or 36
Any besides 17 or 36
0
Description Action(s)
Fax was cancelled by user at control panel of product.
Fax sent successfully.
The receiving fax machine is busy.
The receiving fax machine is not answering the call.
None.
None.
The fax will be retired automatically (if configured), otherwise try resending fax later.
The receiving fax machine may be disconnected or turned off; contact the receiver to check the machine. Try resending.
Try resending fax.
Fax may be corrupted or not sent.
No dial tone is detected when sending the fax.
Unexpected or bad response from the internal fax modem to product.
Verify the phone line is active; set the sending fax to
"not" to detect a dial tone.
Try resending fax; if the error persists, contact service.
NOTE:
This does not necessarily indicate that the modem hardware is bad.
Lost telephone connection between sender and receiver.
May be due to voice calls.
Try resending the fax.
General communications issue where the fax transmission was interrupted or did not proceed as expected.
Unable to read or write the fax image file to disk; could be corrupt product disk or no space available on the product's disk.
Incompatible page width, or page had too many bad lines.
Try resending fax; if the error persists, contact service.
Try resending fax; if the error persists, contact service.
Try resending fax; if the error persists, contact service.
Out of RAM memory on product.
Fax failure; the fax job did not complete.
If error persists, may need to add RAM to product.
Try resending fax; if the error persists, contact service.
256 Chapter 12 Fax ENWW
Table 12-1 Send-fax messages (continued)
Message Error No.
Power Failure 0
No Fax Detected 17 or 36
Description Action(s)
A power failure occurred during the fax transmission on the sending fax product.
Try resending the fax.
No fax machine was detected at receiving end. May be due to voice calls.
Verify fax number and have receiver verify fax machine is on and connected; then try resending fax.
ENWW
Solve fax problems
257
Receive-fax messages
Table 12-2 Receive-fax messages
Message Error No.
Success
Blocked n/a n/a
Modem Fail
Communication Error
Communication Error
Space Fail
Page Fail
Memory Error
Compression Error
Print Fail
Poll Invalid
Job Fail
Power Failure
No Fax Detected
258 Chapter 12 Fax
Any
0
0
0
0
0
17, 36
Any besides 17 or 36
0
Any
0
17, 36
Description Action(s)
Fax received ok.
None.
Fax reception was blocked by receiving fax machine using blocked number feature.
None.
Have fax resent; if the error persists, contact service.
Unexpected or bad response from the internal modem to the product - example is trying to send a fax just as another fax is arriving.
Lost telephone connection or interruption between sender/ receiver.
General communications issue where the fax transmission was interrupted or did not proceed as expected.
Unable to read or write image file to disk; could be corrupt product disk or no space on disk.
Incompatible page width or page had too many bad lines.
Out of RAM memory on product.
Have the sender resend the fax (if the sending machine does not automatically retry).
Have fax resent; if the error persists, contact service.
Have fax resent; if the error persists, contact service.
Have fax resent; if the error persists, contact service.
If error persists, may need to add additional RAM memory to product.
Corrupted fax - the received image file cannot be decoded.
Corrupted fax - the received image file cannot be decoded.
The fax polling feature attempted to retrieve a fax from another machine but no fax was available.
Fax failure; this includes all non-specific failures.
A power failure occurred during the fax reception.
A voice call was made to the fax.
Have fax resent; enable ECM
(Error Correction Mode) if not already.
Have fax resent; enable ECM
(Error Correction Mode) if not already.
Contact the administrator of the fax machine being polled and verify a fax is available, and then retry.
Have fax resent; if the error persists, contact service.
Have the sender resend the fax.
None
ENWW
Fax reports
The following sections list the fax reports available on this product. These reports can be printed or viewed on the product control panel.
The following fax reports are available on this product:
●
Fax Activity Log
●
Billing Codes Report
●
Blocked Fax List
●
Speed Dial List
●
Fax Call Report
Use the following steps to print or view a fax report:
1.
From the Home screen, scroll to and touch the Administration button.
2.
Open the following menus:
●
Reports
●
Fax Reports
3.
Touch the log or report to print or view.
4.
Touch the Print or View button.
Fax activity log
The fax activity log includes the following information.
●
The fax header information configured on the product.
●
The job number of each fax job.
●
Date and time of all faxes received, sent, or failed to send.
●
The type of fax job; send or receive.
●
Identification (phone number, if available)
●
Duration (off-hook time)
●
Number of pages
●
Result (successfully sent, pending, or failed to send which includes error type and code)
The database stores the most recent 500 fax entries (older faxes are deleted from the log). The database fax entries include any fax session as an entry. For example, a fax session could be a sent fax, received fax, or firmware upgrades. Depending on the activity, there might be fewer than 500 entries in the report (unless you sent 500 faxes without receiving any faxes or other completing another activity).
ENWW
Solve fax problems
259
If you want to use the log for record keeping purposes, you should print the log periodically (at least every 500 faxes) and then clear it.
Billing code report
The billing code report is a list of the most recent 500 faxes that were successfully sent, listed by billing code. The following information is provided in this report.
●
Billing code number
●
Date and time of all faxes that were successfully sent
●
Identification number
●
Duration (off hook time)
●
Number of pages sent
●
Result (success)
The database stores the most recent 500 faxes (older faxes are deleted from the database). If you want to use the report for record keeping purposes, you should print the report periodically (at least every
500 faxes) and then clear it.
Blocked fax list report
The blocked fax list report contains the list of fax numbers that the product has been configured to not receive faxes from.
Speed dial list report
A speed dial list report lists the fax numbers assigned to speed dial names.
Fax call report
The fax call report is a brief report that indicates the status of the last fax that was sent or received.
Clear the fax activity log
To clear the fax activity log, complete the following steps.
1.
On the control panel, touch the Administration icon.
2.
Open the following menus:
●
Fax Settings
●
Clear fax activity log
3.
Touch the Clear button to clear the fax activity log.
260 Chapter 12 Fax ENWW
Service settings
These items in the control-panel menus can help with troubleshooting if the corrective action taken under the Error Codes section is unsuccessful. They are intended to be used when an HP service representative is assisting you.
Settings in the Troubleshooting menu
Open the Administration menu, and then select the Troubleshooting menu.
Troubleshooting menu settings T.30 Trace: The T.30 trace is a printed report which produces a record of all the communications between the sending and receiving fax machines for the last Fax transmission or reception. The report has many technical details which are usually beyond the scope of most users.
However the report contains detailed error codes and other information that might be useful in troubleshooting a particular problem related to sending or receiving a FAX. The report contents might be requested by an HP service representative when trying to determine the cause of a problem and will help to determine the appropriate action.
Transmit Signal LossTransmit Signal Loss : This selection compensates for phone line signal loss. It is not recommended to modify this setting unless requested to do so by an HP service representative as it might render the fax inoperable.
V34 : This setting has two values (Normal and Off) that control the modem's baud rate. The Normal setting allows the modem to select (negotiate with the other modem) any of the supported baud rates up to 33,600 bps. The Off setting sets the baud rate to 14,400 bps. This setting remains set, until changed.
Speaker Mode : This service setting has two modes, Normal and Diagnostic. In Normal mode, the modem speaker is turned on during dialing through the initial connection and then shuts off. For Diagnostic mode, the speaker is turned on and remains on for all fax communications until the setting is returned to Normal.
Settings in the Resets menu
Open the Administration menu, and then select the Resets menu.
Resets menu settings Restore Factory Telecom Settings or Restore Default Telecom
Settings : This selection resets several menu changes back to their default settings. This includes the maximum baud rate, ring-burst off time, V.34, speaker mode, and transmit signal loss.
ENWW
Solve fax problems
261
Firmware upgrades
The firmware on the fax accessory can be updated. Fax firmware updates occur as part of an overall product firmware update. See the product user guide for more information.
262 Chapter 12 Fax ENWW
13 Manage and maintain
●
●
Use the HP Embedded Web Server
●
●
●
●
●
●
ENWW 263
Print information pages
Information pages provide details about the product and its current configuration. Use the following procedure to print or view the information pages:
1.
From the Home screen, scroll to and touch the Administration button.
2.
Open the Reports menu.
3.
Select the name of the report you want to review, and then touch the Print button to print it or touch the View button to review the settings on the control-panel display.
NOTE:
Some pages do not have the View option.
Table 13-1 Reports menu
First level
Configuration/Status Pages
Second level
Administration Menu Map
Configuration Page
Fax Reports
Supplies Status
Usage Page
File Directory Page
Color Usage
Fax Activity Log
Billing Codes Report
Blocked Fax List
Speed Dial List
Last Fax Call Report
Description
Shows the product settings and installed accessories.
Shows the approximate remaining life for the supplies; reports statistics on total number of pages and jobs processed, serial number, page counts, and maintenance information.
HP provides approximations of the remaining life for the supplies as a customer convenience. The actual remaining supply levels might be different than the approximations provided.
Shows a count of all paper sizes that have passed through the product; lists whether they were simplex, duplex, monochrome, or color; and reports the page count.
Shows the file name and folder name for files that are stored in the product memory.
Prints the color-use statistics for the product.
Contains a list of the faxes that have been sent from or received by this product.
A list of billing codes that have been used for outgoing faxes. This report shows how many sent faxes were billed to each code.
A list of phone numbers that are blocked from sending faxes to this product.
Shows the speed dials that have been set up for this product.
A detailed report of the last fax operation, either sent or received.
264 Chapter 13 Manage and maintain ENWW
Table 13-1 Reports menu (continued)
First level Second level
Other Pages Demo Page
Color Samples for RGB
CMYK Values
PCL Font List
Description
Prints a demonstration page that highlights the printing capability of the product.
Prints color samples for different RGB values.
Use the samples as a guide for matching printed colors.
Prints color samples for different CMYK values. Use the samples as a guide for matching printed colors.
Prints the available PCL fonts.
ENWW
Print information pages
265
Use the HP Embedded Web Server
Use the HP Embedded Web Server to view product status, configure product network settings, and to manage printing functions from your computer instead of from the product control panel. The following are examples of what you can do using the HP Embedded Web Server:
●
View product status information.
●
Determine the remaining life for all supplies and order new ones.
●
View and change tray configurations.
●
View and change the product control-panel menu configuration.
●
View and print internal pages.
●
Receive notification of product and supplies events.
●
View and change network configuration.
To use the HP Embedded Web Server, you must have Microsoft Internet Explorer 5.01 or later or
Netscape 6.2 or later for Windows, Mac OS, and Linux (Netscape only). Netscape Navigator 4.7 is required for HP-UX 10 and HP-UX 11. The HP Embedded Web Server works when the product is connected to an IP-based network. The HP Embedded Web Server does not support IPX-based product connections. You do not have to have Internet access to open and use the HP Embedded Web Server.
When the product is connected to the network, the HP Embedded Web Server is automatically available.
Open the HP Embedded Web Server by using a network connection
1.
Identify the product IP address or host name. If the Network Address button is visible on the Home screen on the product control panel, touch that button to display the address. Otherwise, follow these steps to print or view the product configuration page:
a. From the Home screen on the product control panel touch the Administration button.
b. Open the following menus:
◦
Reports
◦
Configuration/Status Pages
◦
Configuration Page
c.
Touch the Print or View button.
d. Find the IP address or host name on the Jetdirect page.
2.
In a supported Web browser on your computer, type the product IP address or host name in the address/URL field.
266 Chapter 13 Manage and maintain ENWW
HP Embedded Web Server features
Information tab
Table 13-2 HP Embedded Web Server Information tab
Menu Description
Device Status
Configuration Page
Event Log Page
Usage Page
Device Information
Printable Reports and Pages
Shows the product status and shows the estimated life remaining of HP supplies. The page also shows the type and size of paper set for each tray. To change the default settings, click the Change Settings link.
Shows the information found on the configuration page.
Shows a list of all product events and errors. Use the HP Instant Support link (in the Other Links area on all HP Embedded Web Server pages) to connect to a set of dynamic Web pages that help you solve problems. These pages also show additional services available for the product.
Shows a summary of the number of pages the product has printed, grouped by size, type, and paper print path.
Shows the product network name, address, and model information. To customize these entries, click the Device Information menu on the General tab.
Browse to a file on your computer or network, and print it.
Lists the internal reports and pages for the product. Select one or more items to print or view.
General tab
Table 13-3 HP Embedded Web Server General tab
Menu Description
Control Panel Administration
Menu
Alerts
AutoSend
Control Panel Snapshot
Edit Other Links
Ordering Information
Device Information
Shows the menu structure of the Administration menu on the control panel.
NOTE:
You can configure settings on this screen, but the HP Embedded Web
Server provides more advanced configuration options than are available through the Administration menu.
Set up e-mail alerts for various product and supplies events.
Configure the product to send automated e-mails regarding product configuration and supplies to specific e-mail addresses.
Shows an image of the current screen on the control-panel display.
Add or customize a link to another Web site. This link appears in the Other Links area on all HP Embedded Web Server pages.
Enter specific supplies ordering information to be displayed on the Supplies Status
Page. For example, this information could include the contact information or Web
URL for the company from which you purchase supplies.
Name the product and assign an asset number to it. Enter the name of the primary contact who will receive information about the product.
ENWW
Use the HP Embedded Web Server
267
Table 13-3 HP Embedded Web Server General tab (continued)
Menu Description
Language
Date and Time
Sleep Schedule
Backup and Restore
Solution Installer
Quick Sets Setup
Quota Server Setup
Set the language in which to display the HP Embedded Web Server information.
Set the date and time or synchronize with a network time server.
Set or edit a wake time, sleep time, and sleep delay for the product. You can set a different schedule for each day of the week and for holidays.
Create a backup file that contains product and user data. If necessary, you can use this file to restore data to the product.
Install third-party software programs that can enhance the product functionality.
Configure jobs that are available in the Quick Sets area of the Home screen on product control panel.
Connecting to a quota server ensures that each person who uses the product stays within a predetermined range of printed or scanned pages. When connected, the product queries the server at the start of each job to ensure that the person has pages available.
Copy/Print tab
Table 13-4 HP Embedded Web Server Copy/Print tab
Menu Description
Open from USB Setup
Manage Stored Jobs
Restrict Color
Enable or disable the Open from USB menu on the control panel.
Enable or disable the ability to store jobs in the product memory, and configure jobstorage options.
Permit or restrict color printing and copying. You can specify permissions for individual users or for jobs that are sent from specific software programs.
Scan/Digital Send tab
Table 13-5 HP Embedded Web Server Scan/Digital Send tab
Menu Description
Address Book
Add e-mail addresses into the product one at a time, and edit e-mail addresses that have already been saved in the product. You can also use the Import/Export tab to load a large list of frequently-used e-mail addresses on to the product all at once, rather than adding them one at a time.
268 Chapter 13 Manage and maintain ENWW
Table 13-5 HP Embedded Web Server Scan/Digital Send tab (continued)
Menu Description
E-mail Setup
Save to Network Folder Setup
Save to USB Setup
OXPd: Workflow
Digital Sending Software Setup
Configure the default e-mail settings for digital sending, including the following:
●
Settings for the outgoing mail (SMTP) server
●
Default settings for E-mail Quick Sets jobs
●
Default message settings, such as the "From" address and the subject line.
●
Settings for digital signatures and encryption
●
Settings for e-mail notifications
●
Settings for individual and group sign-in and permissions
●
Default scan settings for e-mail jobs
●
Default file settings for e-mail jobs
Configure the network folder settings for digital sending, including the following:
●
Default settings for Quick Sets jobs saved in a network folder
●
Settings for notifications
●
Default scan settings for jobs saved in a network folder
●
Default file settings for for jobs saved in a network folder
Configure the USB settings for digital sending, including the following:
● Default settings for Quick Sets jobs saved on a USB flash drive
●
Settings for notifications
●
Default scan settings for jobs saved on a USB flash drive
● Default file settings for for jobs saved on a USB flash drive
Use third-party workflow tools.
Configure settings related to using optional Digital Sending software.
Fax tab
Table 13-6 HP Embedded Web Server Fax tab
Menu Description
Fax Send Setup
Configure settings for sending faxes, including the following:
●
Default settings for outgoing faxes
●
Default setting for sending faxes with the internal fax modem
●
Settings for using a LAN fax service
●
Settings for using an Internet fax service
ENWW
Use the HP Embedded Web Server
269
Table 13-6 HP Embedded Web Server Fax tab (continued)
Menu Description
Speed Dials
Fax Receive Setup
Fax Archive and Forwarding
Fax Activity Log
Manage fax speed dial numbers. You can also import .CSV files containing e-mail addresses, fax numbers, or user records, so that they can be accessed on this product. You can also export e-mail, fax, or user records from the product into a file on your computer. You can then use this file as a data backup, or you can use it to import the records onto another HP product.
Configure default print options for incoming faxes, and set up a fax printing schedule.
Enable or disable fax archiving and fax forwarding, and configure basic settings for each.
● Fax archiving is a method to send a copy of all incoming and outgoing faxes to an e-mail address.
●
Fax forwarding is a method to forward incoming faxes to a different fax device.
Contains a list of the faxes that have been sent from or received by this product.
Troubleshooting tab
Table 13-7 HP Embedded Web Server Troubleshooting tab
Menu Description
Reports and Tests
Calibration/Cleaning
Print a variety of reports to help you solve problems with the product.
Change the fax speed and fax speaker mode for diagnostic purposes.
Enable the automatic cleaning feature, set the page count at which the product automatically prints the cleaning page, and set the page size to use for the cleaning page.
Security tab
Table 13-8 HP Embedded Web Server Security tab
Menu Description
General Security
Access Control
Configure an administrator password so you can restrict access to certain features on the product.
Enable or disable the Host USB port on the control panel or the USB connectivity port on the formatter for printing directly from a computer.
Configure access to product functions for specific individuals or groups. Also select the method by which individuals sign in to the product.
270 Chapter 13 Manage and maintain ENWW
Table 13-8 HP Embedded Web Server Security tab (continued)
Menu Description
Protect Stored Data
Certificate Management
Configure and manage the internal hard drive for the product. This product includes an encrypted hard drive for maximum security.
Configure settings for jobs that are stored on the product hard drive.
Install and manage security certificates for access to the product and the network.
Networking tab
Use the Networking tab to change network settings for the product when it is connected to an IPbased network. This tab does not appear if the product is connected to other types of networks.
Other Links list
NOTE:
You can configure which items appear in the Other Links list by using the Edit Other
Links menu on the General tab. The following items are the default links.
Table 13-9 HP Embedded Web Server Other Links list
Menu Description
HP Instant Support
Shop for Supplies
Product Support
Show Me How
Connects you to the HP Web site to help you find solutions to product problems.
Connects to the HP SureSupply Web site, where you can receive information on options for purchasing original HP supplies, such as print cartridges and paper.
Connects to the support site for the product, from which you can search for help regarding various topics.
Connects to information that demonstrates specific tasks for the product, such as clearing jams and printing on various types of paper.
ENWW
Use the HP Embedded Web Server
271
Use HP Web Jetadmin software
HP Web Jetadmin is an award-winning, industry-leading tool for efficiently managing a wide variety of networked HP devices, including printers, multifunction products, and digital senders. This single solution allows you to remotely install, monitor, maintain, troubleshoot, and secure your printing and imaging environment — ultimately increasing business productivity by helping you save time, control costs, and protect your investment.
HP Web Jetadmin updates are periodically made available to provide support for specific product features. Visit www.hp.com/go/webjetadmin and click the Self Help and Documentation link to learn more about updates.
272 Chapter 13 Manage and maintain ENWW
Product security features
Security statements
The product supports security standards and recommended protocols that help you keep the product secure, protect critical information on your network, and simplify the way you monitor and maintain the product.
For in-depth information about HP's secure imaging and printing solutions, visit www.hp.com/go/ secureprinting . The site provides links to white papers and FAQ documents about security features.
IP Security
IP Security (IPsec) is a set of protocols that control IP-based network traffic to and from the product.
IPsec provides host-to-host authentication, data integrity, and encryption of network communications.
For products that are connected to the network and have an HP Jetdirect print server, you can configure
IPsec by using the Networking tab in the HP Embedded Web Server.
Secure the HP Embedded Web Server
Assign an administrator password for access to the product and the HP Embedded Web Server so that unauthorized users cannot change the product settings.
1.
Open the HP Embedded Web Server by entering the product IP address into the address line of a
Web browser.
2.
Click the Security tab.
3.
Open the General Security menu.
4.
In the Username field, type the name to associate with the password.
5.
Type the password in the New Password box, and type it again in the Verify password box.
NOTE:
If you are changing an existing password, you must first type the existing password in the Old Password field.
6.
Click the Apply button. Make note of the password and store it in a safe place.
Encryption support: HP Encrypted High Performance Hard Disks
This product includes an encrypted hard disk. This hard disk provides hardware-based encryption so you can securely store sensitive print, copy, and scan data without impacting product performance.
This hard disk uses the latest Advanced Encryption Standard (AES) and has versatile time-saving features and robust functionality.
Use the Security menu in the HP Embedded Web Server to configure the disk.
ENWW
Product security features
273
For more information about the encrypted hard disk, see the HP High-Performance Secure Hard Disk
Setup Guide.
1.
Go to www.hp.com/support .
2.
Type Secure Hard Disk into the search box and click the >> button.
3.
Click the HP Secure High Performance Hard Disk Drive link.
4.
Click the Manuals link.
Secure stored jobs
You can protect jobs that are stored on the product by assigning a PIN to them. Anyone who tries to print these protected jobs must first enter the PIN at the product control panel.
Lock the control panel menus
You can lock various features on the control panel by using the HP Embedded Web Server.
1.
Open the HP Embedded Web Server by entering the product IP address into the address line of a
Web browser.
2.
Click the the Security tab.
3.
Open the Access Control menu.
4.
In the Sign In and Permission Policies area, select which types of users have permission for each of the features.
5.
Click the Apply button.
Lock the formatter
The formatter area, on the back of the product, has a slot that you can use to attach a security cable.
Locking the formatter prevents someone from removing valuable components from it.
274 Chapter 13 Manage and maintain ENWW
Economy settings
Optimize speed or energy use
By default the product stays warm between jobs to optimize speed. You can set the product to cool between jobs, which conserves energy.
1.
From the Home screen, touch the Administration button.
2.
Open each of the following menus:
a.
General Settings
b.
Energy Settings
c.
Optimum Speed/Energy Usage
3.
Select the option that you want to use.
Powersave modes
Use the Sleep Schedule feature to reduce power consumption when the product is inactive. You can schedule specific times of the day at which the product enters sleep mode or wakes from sleep mode.
You can customize this schedule for each day of the week or for holidays.
Use the Sleep Delay feature to cause the product to enter sleep mode automatically after a predefined period of inactivity.
NOTE:
These features do not affect product warm-up time.
Set sleep mode
1.
From the Home screen, touch the Administration button.
2.
Open each of the following menus:
a.
Display Settings
b.
Sleep Mode
3.
Select one of the following options:
●
Use sleep delay : Activates the Sleep Delay feature.
●
Use sleep schedule : Activates the Sleep Schedule feature.
●
Use both : Use the sleep delay and the sleep schedule.
ENWW
Economy settings
275
Set sleep delay
1.
From the Home screen, touch the Administration button.
2.
Open each of the following menus:
a.
General Settings
b.
Energy Settings
c.
Sleep Delay
3.
Select the appropriate time period, and then touch the OK button.
NOTE:
The default value is 45 minutes.
Set the sleep schedule
NOTE:
You must configure the date and time settings before you can use the Sleep Schedule feature.
If you have already configured the date and time settings, you can skip steps 2 and 3 in the following procedure.
1.
From the Home screen, touch the Administration button, and then open the General Settings menu.
2.
Open the Date/Time Format menu. Configure the following settings:
●
Date Format
●
Time Format
3.
Open the Date/Time menu and configure the following settings:
●
Date
●
Time
●
Time Zone
If you are in an area that uses daylight savings time, select the Adjust for Daylight Savings box.
4.
Open the Energy Settings menu, and then open the Sleep Schedule menu.
5.
Touch the Add button, and then select the type of event to schedule: Wake Up or Sleep .
6.
Configure the following settings:
●
Event Time
●
Event Days
●
Event Description
7.
Open the Holidays menu to configure which days are holidays for your area.
276 Chapter 13 Manage and maintain ENWW
Install external I/O cards
This product is equipped with an external I/O (EIO) slot. You can install an additional HP Jetdirect print server card or external EIO hard drive in the available EIO slot.
NOTE:
This example shows installing an HP Jetdirect print server card.
1.
Turn the product off.
2.
Disconnect all power and interface cables.
NOTE:
This illustration might not show all the cables.
ENWW
Install external I/O cards
277
3.
Loosen and remove the two retaining screws holding the cover for the EIO slot, and then remove the cover. You will not need these screws and the cover again. They can be discarded.
4.
Firmly insert the HP Jetdirect print server card into the EIO slot.
5.
Insert and tighten the retaining screws that came with the print server card.
278 Chapter 13 Manage and maintain ENWW
6.
Reconnect the power cable and remaining interface cables, and turn the product on.
7.
Print a configuration page. An HP Jetdirect configuration page that contains network configuration and status information should also print.
If it does not print, turn the product off, and then uninstall and reinstall the print server card to ensure that it is completely seated in the slot.
8.
Perform one of these steps:
●
Choose the correct port. See the computer or operating system documentation for instructions.
●
Reinstall the software, choosing the network installation this time.
Clean the product
To clean the product exterior, use a soft, water-moistened cloth.
Clean the paper path
1.
From the Home screen, touch the Device Maintenance button.
2.
Open the following menus:
●
Calibration/Cleaning
●
Cleaning Page
3.
Touch the Print button to print the page.
4.
The cleaning process can take several minutes. When it is finished, discard the printed page.
Clean the scanner glass
Over time, specks of debris might collect on the scanner glass and white plastic backing, which can affect performance. Use the following procedure to clean the scanner glass and white plastic backing.
ENWW
Clean the product
279
1.
Use the power switch to turn off the product, and then unplug the power cord from the electrical socket.
2.
Open the scanner lid.
280 Chapter 13 Manage and maintain ENWW
3.
Clean the scanner glass and the white plastic backing with a soft cloth or sponge that has been moistened with nonabrasive glass cleaner. Dry the glass and white plastic backing with a chamois or a cellulose sponge to prevent spotting.
CAUTION:
Do not use abrasives, acetone, benzene, ammonia, ethyl alcohol, or carbon tetrachloride on any part of the product; these can damage the product. Do not place liquids directly on the glass or platen. They might seep and damage the product.
NOTE:
Carefully clean the small glass strip to the left of the scanner glass. Small marks on this glass result in streaks on copies made from the document feeder.
4.
Plug in the product, and then use the power switch to turn on the product.
ENWW
Clean the product
281
Product updates
HP regularly updates features that are available in the product firmware. To take advantage of the most current features, update the product firmware. To download the most recent firmware upgrade, go to www.hp.com/go/cljcm4540mfp_firmware .
282 Chapter 13 Manage and maintain ENWW
14 Solve problems
●
●
●
●
Interpret control-panel messages
●
Paper feeds incorrectly or becomes jammed
●
●
The product does not print or it prints slowly
●
Solve walk-up USB printing problems
●
●
Solve product software problems with Windows
●
Solve product software problems with Mac
ENWW 283
Self help
In addition to the information in this guide, other sources are available that provide helpful information.
Use the Control Panel poster
Quick Reference Topics
Quick Reference Guide
Control panel help
This poster contains information on using the buttons and other features available on the product control panel.
Several Quick Reference Topics for this product are available at this Web site: www.hp.com/support/cljcm4540mfp
You can print these topics and keep them near the product. They are a handy reference for procedures that you perform frequently.
This guide contains procedures for the most commonly used product functions. The guide is available from this Web site: www.hp.com/support/cljcm4540mfp
You can print this guide and keep it near the product.
The control panel has built-in help that guides you through several tasks, such as replacing print cartridges and clearing jams. To open the Help system, touch the
Help button in the upper-right corner of the screen.
284 Chapter 14 Solve problems ENWW
Solve problems checklist
Follow these steps when trying to solve a problem with the product.
1.
Make sure the product Ready light is on. If no lights are on, complete these steps:
a. Check the power-cable connections.
b. Check that the power is turned on.
c.
Make sure that the line voltage is correct for the product power configuration. (See the label that is on the back of the product for voltage requirements.) If you are using a power strip and its voltage is not within specifications, plug the product directly into the wall. If it is already plugged into the wall, try a different outlet.
d. If none of these measures restores power, contact HP Customer Care.
2.
Check the cabling.
a. Check the cable connection between the product and the computer or network port. Make sure that the connection is secure.
b. Make sure that the cable itself is not faulty by using a different cable, if possible.
c.
Check the network connection.
3.
The control panel should indicate ready status. If an error message appears, resolve the error.
4.
Ensure that the paper that you are using meets specifications.
5.
Print a configuration page.
a. From the Home screen on the product control panel, open the following menus:
◦
Administration
◦
Reports
◦
Configuration/Status Pages
◦
Configuration Page
b. Touch the Print button.
If the pages do not print, check that at least one tray contains paper.
If the page jams in the product, follow the instructions on the control panel to clear the jam.
6.
If the configuration page prints, check the following items:
a. If the page does not print correctly, the problem is with the product hardware. Contact
HP Customer Care.
b. If the page prints correctly, then the product hardware is working. The problem is with the computer you are using, with the printer driver, or with the program.
7.
Select one of the following options:
ENWW
Solve problems checklist
285
Windows: Click Start, click Settings, and then click Printers or Printers and Faxes.
Double-click the name of the product.
-or-
Mac OS X: Open the Printer Setup Utility or the Print & Fax list, and double-click the line for the product.
8.
Verify that you have installed the printer driver for this product. Check the program to make sure that you are using the printer driver for this product. The printer driver is on the CD that came with the product. You can also download the printer driver from this Web site: www.hp.com/support/ cljcm4540mfp .
9.
Print a short document from a different program that has worked in the past. If this solution works, then the problem is with the program you are using. If this solution does not work (the document does not print), complete these steps:
a. Try printing the job from another computer that has the product software installed.
b. If you connected the product to the network, connect the product directly to a computer with a USB cable. Redirect the product to the correct port, or reinstall the software, selecting the new connection type that you are using.
Factors that affect product performance
Several factors affect the time it takes to print a job:
●
Maximum product speed, measured in pages per minute (ppm)
●
The use of special paper (such as transparencies, heavy paper, and custom-size paper)
●
Product processing and download time
●
The complexity and size of graphics
●
The speed of the computer you are using
●
The USB connection
●
The product I/O configuration
●
The network operating system and configuration (if applicable)
●
The printer driver that you are using
286 Chapter 14 Solve problems ENWW
Restore factory settings
1.
From the Home screen, scroll to and touch the Administration menu.
2.
Open the following menus:
●
General Settings
●
Restore Factory Settings
3.
Select one or more categories of settings from the list, and then touch the Reset button.
ENWW
Restore factory settings
287
Interpret control-panel messages
Control-panel message types
Four types of control-panel messages can indicate the status of or problems with the product.
Message type
Status messages
Warning messages
Error messages
Description
Status messages reflect the current state of the product. They inform you of normal product operation and require no interaction to clear them. They change as the state of the product changes. Whenever the product is ready, not busy, and has no pending warning messages, the Ready status message appears if the product is online.
Warning messages inform you of data and print errors. These messages typically alternate with the
Ready or status messages and remain until you touch the OK button. Some warning messages are clearable. If the Clearable Warnings menu in the Display Settings menu is set to the Job option , the next print job clears these messages.
Error messages communicate that some action must be performed, such as adding paper or clearing a jam.
Some error messages are auto-continuable. If the Continuable Events menu in the Display Settings menu is set to the Auto-Continue option, the product continues normal operation after an autocontinuable error message appears for 10 seconds.
NOTE:
Pressing any button during the 10-second auto-continuable error message overrides the auto-continue feature, and the button function takes precedence. For example, pressing the Stop button pauses printing and offers the option to cancel the print job.
Critical-error messages Critical error messages inform you of a product failure. You can clear some of these messages by turning the product off and then on. These messages are not affected by the Auto-Continue setting. If a critical error persists, service is required.
Control-panel messages
The product provides robust control panel messaging. When a message appears on the control panel, follow the on-screen instructions to resolve the issue. If the product displays an “Error” or “Attention” message, and no steps are shown to resolve the issue, turn the product off then on. Contact HP support if you continue to experience issues with the product.
To get additional information for warnings that appear in the status line, touch the Warning button .
For additional information on a variety of topics, touch the Help button in the upper-right corner of the home screen.
288 Chapter 14 Solve problems ENWW
Paper feeds incorrectly or becomes jammed
●
The product does not pick up paper
●
The product picks up multiple sheets of paper
●
●
The product does not pick up paper
If the product does not pick up paper from the tray, try these solutions.
1.
Open the product and remove any jammed sheets of paper.
2.
Load the tray with the correct size of paper for your job.
3.
Make sure the paper guides in the tray are adjusted correctly for the size of paper. Adjust the guides so they are touching the paper stack without bending it.
4.
Check the product control panel to see if the product is waiting for you to acknowledge a prompt to feed the paper manually. Load paper, and continue.
The product picks up multiple sheets of paper
If the product picks up multiple sheets of paper from the tray, try these solutions.
1.
Remove the stack of paper from the tray and flex it, rotate it 180 degrees, and flip it over. Do not
fan the paper. Return the stack of paper to the tray.
2.
Use only paper that meets HP specifications for this product.
3.
Use paper that is not wrinkled, folded, or damaged. If necessary, use paper from a different package.
4.
Make sure the tray is not overfilled. If it is, remove the entire stack of paper from the tray, straighten the stack, and then return some of the paper to the tray.
5.
Make sure the paper guides in the tray are adjusted correctly for the size of paper. Adjust the guides so they are touching the paper stack without bending it.
Prevent paper jams
To reduce the number of paper jams, try these solutions.
1.
Use only paper that meets HP specifications for this product.
2.
Use paper that is not wrinkled, folded, or damaged. If necessary, use paper from a different package.
3.
Use paper that has not previously been printed or copied on.
ENWW
Paper feeds incorrectly or becomes jammed
289
4.
Make sure the tray is not overfilled. If it is, remove the entire stack of paper from the tray, straighten the stack, and then return some of the paper to the tray.
5.
Make sure the paper guides in the tray are adjusted correctly for the size of paper. Adjust the guides so they are touching the paper stack without bending it.
6.
Make sure that the tray is fully inserted in the product.
7.
If you are printing on heavy, embossed, or perforated paper, use the manual feed feature and feed sheets one at a time.
Clear jams
Jam locations
Use this illustration to identify locations of jams. In addition, instructions appear on the control panel to direct you to the location of jammed paper and how to clear it.
NOTE:
Internal areas of the product that might need to be opened to clear jams have green handles or green labels.
WARNING!
To avoid electrical shock, remove any necklaces, bracelets, or other metal items before reaching into the inside of the product.
Figure 14-1
Jam locations
1
2
3
8
4
7
5
6
3
4
1
2
5
6
Document feeder
Top cover
Right door
Tray 1 area
Tray 2, and optional Trays 3, 4, and 5
Lower-right door
290 Chapter 14 Solve problems ENWW
7
8
Stapler
Output bins
ENWW
Paper feeds incorrectly or becomes jammed
291
Clear jams in the document feeder
1.
Open the document feeder cover.
2.
Lift the jam-access door, and remove any jammed paper.
3.
Close the document feeder cover.
292 Chapter 14 Solve problems ENWW
Clear paper jams in the stapler
1.
Lift the gray latch on the front of the stapler, and open the stapler cover.
2.
If jammed paper is visible underneath the paper guide, pull it straight out.
ENWW
Paper feeds incorrectly or becomes jammed
293
3.
Lift the green jam-access door. If jammed paper is visible under the jam-access door, pull it straight out,
4.
Close the stapler cover.
Clear staple jams
1.
Lift the gray latch on the front of the stapler, and open the stapler cover.
294 Chapter 14 Solve problems ENWW
2.
Lift the green tab on the staple cartridge up, and then pull the staple cartridge straight out.
3.
Lift up on the small lever at the back of the staple cartridge.
4.
Remove the jammed staples.
5.
Close the lever at the back of the staple cartridge. Be sure that it snaps into place.
ENWW
Paper feeds incorrectly or becomes jammed
295
6.
Insert the staple cartridge into the stapler and push down on the green handle until it snaps into place.
7.
Close the stapler cover.
296 Chapter 14 Solve problems ENWW
Clear jams in the output bin area
1.
If paper is visible from the output bin, grasp the leading edge and remove it.
Clear jams from under the top cover
1.
Pull the top-cover-release lever forward, and then lift the top cover up.
ENWW
Paper feeds incorrectly or becomes jammed
297
2.
Remove any jammed sheets that are under the top cover.
CAUTION:
Do not touch the foam rollers that are under the top cover. Contaminants can affect print quality.
3.
Close the top cover.
298 Chapter 14 Solve problems ENWW
Clear jams in the right door
CAUTION:
The fuser can be hot while the product is in use. Wait for the fuser to cool before handling it.
1.
Open the right door.
2.
Gently pull the paper out of the pickup area.
3.
If paper is visible entering the bottom of the fuser, gently pull downward to remove it.
CAUTION:
Do not touch the rollers on the transfer roller. Contaminants can affect print quality.
ENWW
Paper feeds incorrectly or becomes jammed
299
4.
If paper is jammed as it enters the output bin, remove the fuser and gently pull the paper downward to remove it.
5.
Paper could be jammed inside the fuser where it would not be visible. Grasp the fuser handles, lift up slightly, and then pull straight out to remove the fuser.
CAUTION:
The fuser can be hot while the product is in use. Wait for the fuser to cool before handling it.
6.
Open the jam-access door. If paper is jammed inside the fuser, gently pull it straight up to remove it. If the paper tears, remove all paper fragments.
CAUTION:
Even if the body of the fuser has cooled, the rollers that are inside could still be hot. Do not touch the fuser rollers until they have cooled.
300 Chapter 14 Solve problems ENWW
7.
Close the jam-access door, and push the fuser completely into the product.
8.
Close the right door.
ENWW
Paper feeds incorrectly or becomes jammed
301
Clear jams in Tray 1
1.
If jammed paper is visible in Tray 1, clear the jam by gently pulling the paper straight out.
Touch the OK button to clear the message.
2.
If you cannot remove the paper, or if no jammed paper is visible in Tray 1, close Tray
1 and open the right door.
302 Chapter 14 Solve problems ENWW
3.
Gently pull the paper out of the pick up area.
4.
Close the right door.
ENWW
Paper feeds incorrectly or becomes jammed
303
Clear jams in Trays 2, 3, 4, or 5
CAUTION:
Opening a tray when paper is jammed can cause the paper to tear and leave pieces of paper in the tray, which might cause another jam. Be sure to clear jams before opening the tray.
1.
Open the tray and make sure that the paper is stacked correctly. Remove any jammed or damaged sheets of paper. To access jammed paper from the tray cavity, remove the tray from the product.
2.
Close the tray.
304 Chapter 14 Solve problems ENWW
Clear jams in the lower-right door (Trays 3, 4, or 5)
1.
Open the lower-right door.
2.
If paper is visible, gently pull the jammed paper up or down to remove it.
3.
Close the lower-right door.
ENWW
Paper feeds incorrectly or becomes jammed
305
Change jam recovery
This product provides a jam recovery feature that reprints jammed pages.
1.
From the Home screen, scroll to and touch the
Administration button.
2.
Open the General Settings menu, and then open the Jam Recovery menu.
3.
Select one of the following options:
●
Auto — The product attempts to reprint jammed pages when sufficient memory is available. This is the default setting.
●
Off — The product does not attempt to reprint jammed pages. Because no memory is used to store the most recent pages, performance is optimal.
NOTE:
When using this option, if the product runs out of paper and the job is being printed on both sides, some pages can be lost.
●
On — The product always reprints jammed pages. Additional memory is allocated to store the last few pages printed. This might cause overall performance to suffer.
306 Chapter 14 Solve problems ENWW
Improve print quality
You can prevent most print-quality problems by following these guidelines.
●
Use the correct paper type setting in the printer driver.
●
Use paper that meets HP specifications for this product.
●
Clean the product as necessary.
●
Replace print cartridges when they are reaching the end of their estimated life and print quality is no longer acceptable.
●
Use the printer driver that best meets your printing needs.
Select a paper type
1.
Open the printer driver, click the Properties or Preferences button, and then click the Paper/
Quality tab.
2.
Select a type from the Type is drop-down list.
3.
Click the OK button.
Use paper that meets HP specifications
Use different paper if you are having any of the following problems:
●
The printing is too light or seems faded in areas.
●
Specks of toner are on the printed pages.
●
Toner is smearing on the printed pages.
●
Printed characters seem misformed.
●
Printed pages are curled.
Always use a paper type and weight that this product supports. In addition, follow these guidelines when selecting paper:
●
Use paper that is of good quality and free of cuts, nicks, tears, spots, loose particles, dust, wrinkles, voids, staples, and curled or bent edges.
●
Use paper that has not been previously printed on.
●
Use paper that is designed for use in laser printers. Do not use paper that is designed only for use in Inkjet printers.
●
Use paper that is not too rough. Using smoother paper generally results in better print quality.
ENWW
Improve print quality
307
Print a cleaning page
Print a cleaning page to remove dust and excess toner from the paper path if you are having any of the following problems:
●
Specks of toner are on the printed pages.
●
Toner is smearing on the printed pages.
●
Repeated marks occur on the printed pages.
Use the following procedure to print a cleaning page.
1.
From the Home screen, touch the Device Maintenance button.
2.
Open the following menus:
●
Calibration/Cleaning
●
Cleaning Page
3.
Touch the Print button to print the page.
4.
The cleaning process can take several minutes. When it is finished, discard the printed page.
Calibrate the product
Calibration is a product function that optimizes print quality. If you experience any image-quality problems, calibrate the product.
1.
From the Home screen, touch the Device Maintenance button.
2.
Open the following menus:
●
Calibration/Cleaning
●
Full Calibration
3.
Wait while the product calibrates, and then try printing again.
Set the image registration
If you are having problems with text aligning on the page, use the Set Registration menu to set the image registration.
1.
From the Home screen, touch the Administration button.
2.
Open the following menus:
a.
General Settings
b.
Print Quality
c.
Image Registration
d.
Adjust Tray <X>
308 Chapter 14 Solve problems ENWW
3.
Touch the Print Test Page setting, and then touch the OK button.
4.
Follow the instructions on the test page to complete the adjustment.
Internal print-quality-test pages
Use the built-in print-quality-troubleshooting pages to help diagnose and solve print-quality problems.
1.
From the Home screen, touch the Administration button.
2.
Open the following menus:
●
Troubleshooting
●
Print Quality Pages
●
PQ Troubleshooting Pages
3.
Touch the Print button. Follow the instructions on the pages that print.
Check the print cartridge
Check each print cartridge, and replace it if necessary, if you are having any of the following problems:
●
The printing is too light or seems faded in areas.
●
Printed pages have small unprinted areas.
●
Printed pages have streaks or bands.
NOTE:
If you are using a draft or EconoMode print setting, the printing might appear light.
If you determine that you need to replace a print cartridge, print the supplies status page to find the part number for the correct genuine HP print cartridge.
Type of print cartridge
Refilled or remanufactured print cartridge
Genuine HP print cartridge
Steps to resolve the problem
Hewlett-Packard Company cannot recommend the use of non-HP supplies, either new or remanufactured. Because they are not HP products, HP cannot influence their design or control their quality. If you are using a refilled or remanufactured print cartridge and are not satisfied with the print quality, replace the cartridge with a genuine HP cartridge that has the words “HP” or “Hewlett-Packard” on it, or has the HP logo on it.
1.
The product control panel or the supplies status page indicates Very Low status when the cartridge has reached the end of its designated life. Replace the print cartridge if print quality is no longer acceptable.
2.
Visually inspect the print cartridge for damage. See the instructions that follow.
Replace the print cartridge if necessary.
3.
If printed pages have marks that repeat several times at the same distance apart, print a cleaning page. If this does not solve the problem, use the repeating defects information in this document to identify the cause of the problem.
ENWW
Improve print quality
309
Use the printer driver that best meets your printing needs
You might need to use a different printer driver if the printed page has unexpected lines in graphics, missing text, missing graphics, incorrect formatting, or substituted fonts.
HP PCL 6 driver
HP UPD PS driver
HP UPD PCL 5
HP UPD PCL 6
●
Provided as the default driver. This driver is automatically installed unless you select a different one.
●
Recommended for all Windows environments
●
Provides the overall best speed, print quality, and product-feature support for most users
●
Developed to align with the Windows Graphic Device Interface (GDI) for the best speed in Windows environments
●
Might not be fully compatible with third-party and custom software programs that are based on PCL 5
● Recommended for printing with Adobe ® software programs or with other highly graphics-intensive software programs
● Provides support for printing from postscript emulation needs, or for postscript flash font support
●
Recommended for general office printing in Windows environments
●
Compatible with previous PCL versions and older HP LaserJet products
●
The best choice for printing from third-party or custom software programs
●
The best choice when operating with mixed environments, which require the product to be set to PCL 5 (UNIX, Linux, mainframe)
●
Designed for use in corporate Windows environments to provide a single driver for use with multiple printer models
●
Preferred when printing to multiple printer models from a mobile Windows computer
●
Recommended for printing in all Windows environments
●
Provides the overall best speed, print quality, and printer feature support for most users
● Developed to align with Windows Graphic Device Interface (GDI) for best speed in Windows environments
●
May not be fully compatible with third-party and custom solutions based on
PCL5
Download additional printer drivers from this Web site: www.hp.com/go/cljcm4540mfp_software .
310 Chapter 14 Solve problems ENWW
Improve print quality for copies
If you encounter print quality problems in copied documents, review the solutions for printed documents listed previously in this document. However, some print-quality problems occur only in copied documents.
●
If streaks appear on copies made by using the document feeder, clean the small glass strip on the left side of the scanner assembly.
●
If dots or other defects appear on copies made by using the scanner glass, clean the scanner glass and the white plastic backing.
ENWW
1.
Use the power switch to turn off the product, and then unplug the power cord from the electrical socket.
2.
Open the scanner lid.
3.
Clean the scanner glass and the white plastic backing with a soft cloth or sponge that has been moistened with nonabrasive glass cleaner.
CAUTION:
Do not use abrasives, acetone, benzene, ammonia, ethyl alcohol, or carbon tetrachloride on any part of the product; these can damage the product. Do not place liquids directly on the glass or platen. They might seep and damage the product.
4.
Dry the glass and white plastic backing with a chamois or a cellulose sponge to prevent spotting.
5.
Plug in the product, and then use the power switch to turn on the product.
Improve print quality
311
The product does not print or it prints slowly
The product does not print
If the product does not print at all, try the following solutions.
1.
Make sure the product is turned on and that the control panel indicates it is ready.
◦
If the control panel does not indicate the product is ready, turn the product off and then on again.
◦
If the control panel indicates the product is ready, try sending the job again.
2.
If the control panel indicates the product has an error, resolve the error and then try sending the job again.
3.
Make sure the cables are all connected correctly. If the product is connected to a network, check the following items:
◦
Check the light next to the network connection on the product. If the network is active, the light is green.
◦
Make sure that you are using a network cable and not a phone cord to connect to the network.
◦
Make sure the network router, hub, or switch is turned on and that it is working correctly.
4.
Install the HP software from the CD that came with the product. Using generic printer drivers can cause delays clearing jobs from the print queue.
5.
From the list of printers on your computer, right-click the name of this product, click Properties, and open the Ports tab.
◦
If you are using a network cable to connect to the network, make sure the printer name listed on the Ports tab matches the product name on the product configuration page.
◦
If you are using a USB cable and are connecting to a wireless network, make sure the box is checked next to Virtual printer port for USB.
6.
If you are using a personal firewall system on the computer, it might be blocking communication with the product. Try temporarily disabling the firewall to see if it is the source of the problem.
7.
If your computer or the product is connected to a wireless network, low signal quality or interference might be delaying print jobs.
312 Chapter 14 Solve problems ENWW
The product prints slowly
If the product prints, but it seems slow, try the following solutions.
1.
Make sure the computer meets the minimum specifications for this product. For a list of specifications, go to this Web site: www.hp.com/support/cljcm4540mfp .
2.
When you configure the product to print on some paper types, such as heavy paper, the product prints more slowly so it can correctly fuse the toner to the paper. If the paper type setting is not correct for the type of paper you are using, change the setting to the correct paper type.
3.
If your computer is connected to a wireless network, low signal quality or interference might be delaying print jobs.
ENWW
The product does not print or it prints slowly
313
Solve walk-up USB printing problems
●
The Open from USB menu does not open when you insert the USB accessory
●
The file does not print from the USB storage accessory
●
The file that you want to print is not listed in the Open from USB menu
The Open from USB menu does not open when you insert the USB accessory
1.
You might be using a USB storage accessory or a file system that this product does not support.
Save the files on a standard USB storage accessory that uses File Allocation Table (FAT) file systems. The product supports FAT12, FAT16, and FAT32 USB storage accessories.
2.
If another menu is already open, close that menu and then reinsert the USB storage accessory.
3.
The USB storage accessory might have multiple partitions. (Some USB storage accessory manufacturers install software on the accessory that creates partitions, similar to a CD.) Reformat the USB storage accessory to remove the partitions, or use a different USB storage accessory.
4.
The USB storage accessory might require more power than the product can provide.
a. Remove the USB storage accessory.
b. Turn the product off and then on.
c.
Use a USB storage accessory that has its own power supply or that requires less power.
5.
The USB storage accessory might not be functioning correctly.
a. Remove the USB storage accessory.
b. Turn the product off and then on.
c.
Try printing from another USB storage accessory.
The file does not print from the USB storage accessory
1.
Make sure paper is in the tray.
2.
Check the control panel for messages. If paper is jammed in the product, clear the jam.
314 Chapter 14 Solve problems ENWW
The file that you want to print is not listed in the Open from USB menu
1.
You might be trying to print a file type that the USB printing feature does not support. The product supports .pdf, .prn, .pcl, .ps, and .cht file types.
2.
You might have too many files in a single folder on the USB storage accessory. Reduce the number of files in the folder by moving them to subfolders.
3.
You might be using a character set for the file name that the product does not support. In this case, the product replaces the file names with characters from a different character set. Rename the files using ASCII characters.
ENWW
Solve walk-up USB printing problems
315
Solve connectivity problems
Solve direct-connect problems
If you have connected the product directly to a computer, check the cable.
●
Verify that the cable is connected to the computer and to the product.
●
Verify that the cable is not longer than 5 m (16.4 ft). Try using a shorter cable.
●
Verify that the cable is working correctly by connecting it to another product. Replace the cable if necessary.
Solve network problems
Check the following items to verify that the product is communicating with the network. Before beginning, print a configuration page from the product control panel and locate the product IP address that is listed on this page.
●
●
The computer is using the incorrect IP address for the product
●
The computer is unable to communicate with the product
●
The product is using incorrect link and duplex settings for the network
●
New software programs might be causing compatibility problems
●
The computer or workstation might be set up incorrectly
●
The product is disabled, or other network settings are incorrect
Poor physical connection
1.
Verify that the product is attached to the correct network port using a cable of the correct length.
2.
Verify that cable connections are secure.
3.
Look at the network port connection on the back of the product, and verify that the amber activity light and the green link-status light are lit.
4.
If the problem continues, try a different cable or port on the hub.
The computer is using the incorrect IP address for the product
1.
Open the printer properties and click the Ports tab. Verify that the current IP address for the product is selected. The product IP address is listed on the product configuration page.
2.
If you installed the product using the HP standard TCP/IP port, select the box labeled Always
print to this printer, even if its IP address changes.
316 Chapter 14 Solve problems ENWW
3.
If you installed the product using a Microsoft standard TCP/IP port, use the hostname instead of the IP address.
4.
If the IP address is correct, delete the product and then add it again.
The computer is unable to communicate with the product
1.
Test network communication by pinging the network.
a. Open a command-line prompt on your computer. For Windows, click Start, click Run, and then type cmd.
b. Type ping followed by the IP address for your product.
c.
If the window displays round-trip times, the network is working.
2.
If the ping command failed, verify that the network hubs are on, and then verify that the network settings, the product, and the computer are all configured for the same network.
The product is using incorrect link and duplex settings for the network
Hewlett-Packard recommends leaving this setting in automatic mode (the default setting). If you change these settings, you must also change them for your network.
New software programs might be causing compatibility problems
Verify that any new software programs are correctly installed and that they use the correct printer driver.
The computer or workstation might be set up incorrectly
1.
Check the network drivers, printer drivers, and the network redirection.
2.
Verify that the operating system is configured correctly.
The product is disabled, or other network settings are incorrect
1.
Review the configuration page to check the status of the network protocol. Enable it if necessary.
2.
Reconfigure the network settings if necessary.
ENWW
Solve connectivity problems
317
Solve product software problems with Windows
Problem
A printer driver for the product is not visible in the Printer folder
An error message was displayed during the software installation
The product is in Ready mode, but nothing prints
Solution
Reinstall the product software.
NOTE:
Close any applications that are running. To close an application that has an icon in the system tray, right-click the icon, and select Close or Disable.
Try plugging the USB cable into a different USB port on the computer.
Reinstall the product software.
NOTE:
Close any applications that are running. To close an application that has an icon in the task bar, right-click the icon, and select Close or Disable.
Check the amount of free space on the drive where you are installing the product software. If necessary, free up as much space as you can, and reinstall the product software.
If necessary, run the Disk Defragmenter, and reinstall the product software.
Print a Configuration page, and verify the product functionality.
Verify that all of the cables are correctly seated and within specifications. This includes the USB and power cables. Try a new cable.
Verify the IP Address on the Embedded Jetdirect Page matches the IP address for the software port. Use one of the following procedures:
Windows XP, Windows Server
2003, Windows Server 2008, and Windows Vista
1.
Click Start.
2.
Click Settings.
3.
Click Printers and Faxes (using the default Start menu view) or click Printers (using the Classic Start menu view).
4.
Right-click the product driver icon, and then select Properties.
5.
Click the Ports tab, and then click Configure Port.
6.
Verify the IP address, and then click OK or Cancel.
7.
If the IP Addresses are not the same, delete the driver, and reinstall the driver using the correct IP address.
2.
Click Devices and Printers.
3.
Right-click the product driver icon, and then select Printer
properties.
4.
Click the Ports tab, and then click Configure Port.
5.
Verify the IP address, and then click OK or Cancel.
6.
If the IP Addresses are not the same, delete the driver, and reinstall the driver using the correct IP address.
318 Chapter 14 Solve problems ENWW
Solve product software problems with Mac
●
The printer driver is not listed in the Print & Fax list
●
The product name does not appear in the product list in the Print & Fax list
●
The printer driver does not automatically set up the selected product in the Print & Fax list
●
A print job was not sent to the product that you wanted
●
●
You are using a generic printer driver when using a USB connection
The printer driver is not listed in the Print & Fax list
1.
Make sure that the product .GZ file is in the following hard-drive folder: Library/Printers/
PPDs/Contents/Resources
. If necessary, reinstall the software.
2.
If the GZ file is in the folder, the PPD file might be corrupt. Delete the file and then reinstall the software.
The product name does not appear in the product list in the Print &
Fax list
1.
Make sure that the cables are connected correctly and the product is on.
2.
Print a configuration page to check the product name. Verify that the name on the configuration page matches the product name in the Print & Fax list.
3.
Replace the USB or network cable with a high-quality cable.
The printer driver does not automatically set up the selected product in the Print & Fax list
1.
Make sure that the cables are connected correctly and the product is on.
2.
Make sure that the product .GZ file is in the following hard-drive folder: Library/Printers/
PPDs/Contents/Resources
. If necessary, reinstall the software.
3.
If the GZ file is in the folder, the PPD file might be corrupt. Delete the file and then reinstall the software.
4.
Replace the USB or network cable with a high-quality cable.
ENWW
Solve product software problems with Mac
319
A print job was not sent to the product that you wanted
1.
Open the print queue and restart the print job.
2.
Another product with the same or similar name might have received your print job. Print a configuration page to check the product name. Verify that the name on the configuration page matches the product name in the Print & Fax list.
When connected with a USB cable, the product does not appear in the Print & Fax list after the driver is selected.
Software troubleshooting
▲
Make sure that your Mac operating system is Mac OS X 10.5 or later.
Hardware troubleshooting
1.
Make sure that the product is turned on.
2.
Make sure that the USB cable is connected correctly.
3.
Make sure that you are using the appropriate high-speed USB cable.
4.
Make sure that you do not have too many USB devices drawing power from the chain. Disconnect all of the devices from the chain, and connect the cable directly to the USB port on the computer
5.
Check to see if more than two non-powered USB hubs are connected in a row on the chain.
Disconnect all of the devices from the chain, and then connect the cable directly to the USB port on the computer.
NOTE:
The iMac keyboard is a non-powered USB hub.
You are using a generic printer driver when using a USB connection
If you connected the USB cable before you installed the software, you might be using a generic printer driver instead of the driver for this product.
1.
Delete the generic printer driver.
2.
Reinstall the software from the product CD. Do not connect the USB cable until the software installation program prompts you.
3.
If multiple printers are installed, make sure that you have selected the correct printer in the
Format For drop-down menu in the Print dialog box.
320 Chapter 14 Solve problems ENWW
A Product supplies and accessories
●
Order parts, accessories, and supplies
●
ENWW 321
Order parts, accessories, and supplies
Order supplies and paper
Order genuine HP parts or accessories
Order through service or support providers
Order using HP software www.hp.com/go/suresupply www.hp.com/buy/parts
Contact an HP-authorized service or support provider.
Use the HP Embedded Web Server on page 266
322 Appendix A Product supplies and accessories ENWW
Part numbers
Accessories
Item
HP Color LaserJet 500-sheet Paper
Feeder and Cabinet
HP Color LaserJet 3 x 500-sheet Paper
Feeder and Stand
HP LaserJet 900-sheet 3-bin Stapling
Mailbox
HP Color LaserJet 500-sheet Paper
Feeder
HP LaserJet MFP Analog Fax Accessory
500
Description
500-sheet paper tray with a storage cabinet.
1500-sheet paper tray. Contains three
500-sheet trays and a stand.
Stapler with a 3-bin output mailbox that holds up to 900 sheets.
500-sheet input tray (no storage cabinet or stand)
Provides fax capability for the product.
This is included with the CM4540f MFP and CM4540fskm MFP models.
Product number
CC422A
CC423A
CC424A
CC425A
CC487A
Cables and interfaces
Item
Enhanced I/O (EIO) card
USB cable
Description Product number
HP Jetdirect 635n IPv6/IPsec Print
Server
2-meter standard USB-compatible device connector
J7961G
C6518A
Customer self-repair parts
The following Customer Self-Repair parts are available for your product.
●
Parts listed as Mandatory self-replacement are to be installed by customers, unless you are willing to pay HP service personnel to perform the repair. For these parts, on-site or return-to-depot support is not provided under your HP product warranty.
●
Parts listed as Optional self-replacement may be installed by HP service personnel at your request for no additional charge during the product warranty period.
NOTE:
For more information, go to www.hp.com/go/learnaboutsupplies .
Table A-1 Customer self-repair parts
Item
HP Color LaserJet black print cartridge
Description Self-replacement options
Standard black cartridge Mandatory
Product number
CE260A
Part number
CE260-67901
ENWW Part numbers 323
Table A-1 Customer self-repair parts (continued)
Item Description Self-replacement options
Mandatory HP Color LaserJet black print cartridge
HP Color LaserJet cyan print cartridge
HP Color LaserJet yellow print cartridge
HP Color LaserJet magenta print cartridge
HP Color LaserJet Toner
Collection Unit
High-capacity black cartridge
Cyan cartridge
Yellow cartridge
Magenta cartridge
Receptacle for toner that has not fused to the paper.
HP Staple cartridge Replacement staple cartridge, which holds
5,000 staples
HP Color LaserJet fuser kit Replacement fuser
Mandatory
Mandatory
Mandatory
Mandatory
Mandatory
Mandatory
Fuser cleaning kit
Document feeder maintenance kit
HP Color LaserJet image transfer kit
Repair maintenance kit
Control panel kit
HP LaserJet 900-sheet 3bin Stapling Mailbox
HP Color LaserJet 500sheet Paper Feeder
HP Color LaserJet 500sheet Paper Feeder and
Cabinet
Includes 50 sheets of HP
LaserJet Tough Paper and instructions to clean the fuser
Includes a replacement roller assembly and separation pad for the document feeder
Replacement transfer unit, transfer roller, Tray 1 pickup roller, and eight feed and separation rollers for Trays 2-5.
Replacement transfer unit and transfer roller
Replacement control panel
Replacement stapler/ stacker
500-sheet input tray (no storage cabinet or stand)
500-sheet paper tray with a storage cabinet
Mandatory
Mandatory
Mandatory
Mandatory
Optional
Mandatory
Mandatory
Mandatory
Product number
CE264X
CF031A
CF032A
CF033A
CE265A
C8091A
CE248A
CE249A
Part number
CE264-67901
CF031-67901
CF032-67901
CF033-67901
CC493-67913
110 Volt fuser: CE246A 110 Volt fuser:
CC493-67911
200 Volt fuser: CE247A
200 Volt fuser:
CC493-67912
CC419-67905
CE248-67901
CC493-67910
CC493-67909
CC419-67901
CC424A
CC425A
CC422A
CC424-67901
CC425-67901
CC493-67902
324 Appendix A Product supplies and accessories ENWW
Table A-1 Customer self-repair parts (continued)
Item Description Self-replacement options
HP Color LaserJet 3 x
500-sheet Paper Feeder and Stand
HP LaserJet MFP Analog
Fax Accessory 500
1500-sheet paper tray.
Contains three 500-sheet trays and a stand.
Mandatory
Provides fax capability for the product. This is included with the
CM4540f MFP and
CM4540fskm MFP models.
Mandatory
One feed roller and eight separation rollers
Mandatory Feed roller and separation roller kit for
Trays 2–5
Tray 1 roller kit
Formatter assembly kit
Internal hard disk assembly kit
Output bin bezel
Document feeder bin extension
Pickup roller for Tray 1
Replacement formatter
(requires you to exchange the previous formatter)
Replacement
HP Encrypted High
Performance Hard Disk
Mandatory
Mandatory
Mandatory
Replacement bezel for using the standard output bin
Replacement long-paper extension for the document feeder output bin
Replacement roller
Mandatory
Mandatory
Mandatory Secondary transfer roller kit
Document feeder feed roller
Document feeder pickup roller
Document feeder separation pad
Document feeder separation pad spring
Tray 2, 3, 4, or 5
Pickup roller for Trays 2–
5
Replacement roller
Replacement roller
Replacement separation pad
Replacement spring
Replacement paper cassette
Replacement roller
Mandatory
Mandatory
Mandatory
Mandatory
Mandatory
Mandatory
Product number
CC423A
CC487A
Part number
CC493-67903
CC456-60002
CC493-67907
CC493-67906
CE871-69001
CC419-67902
CC419-67904
CC419-67903
CC493-67908
PF2309K131NI
PF2309K132NI
PF2309K133NI
PF2309P322NI
RM1-5928-000CN
RL1-2099-000CN
ENWW Part numbers 325
326 Appendix A Product supplies and accessories ENWW
B Service and support
●
Hewlett-Packard limited warranty statement
●
HP's Premium Protection Warranty: LaserJet print cartridge limited warranty statement
●
Color LaserJet Fuser Kit, Transfer Kit, and Roller Kit Limited Warranty Statement
●
Data stored on the print cartridge
●
●
●
Customer self-repair warranty service
●
ENWW 327
Hewlett-Packard limited warranty statement
HP PRODUCT
HP Color LaserJet CM4540, CM4540f, CM4540fskm
DURATION OF LIMITED WARRANTY
One-year on-site warranty
HP warrants to you, the end-user customer, that HP hardware and accessories will be free from defects in materials and workmanship after the date of purchase, for the period specified above. If HP receives notice of such defects during the warranty period, HP will, at its option, either repair or replace products which prove to be defective. Replacement products may be either new or equivalent in performance to new.
HP warrants to you that HP software will not fail to execute its programming instructions after the date of purchase, for the period specified above, due to defects in material and workmanship when properly installed and used. If HP receives notice of such defects during the warranty period, HP will replace software which does not execute its programming instructions due to such defects.
HP does not warrant that the operation of HP products will be uninterrupted or error free. If HP is unable, within a reasonable time, to repair or replace any product to a condition as warranted, you will be entitled to a refund of the purchase price upon prompt return of the product.
HP products may contain remanufactured parts equivalent to new in performance or may have been subject to incidental use.
Warranty does not apply to defects resulting from (a) improper or inadequate maintenance or calibration, (b) software, interfacing, parts or supplies not supplied by HP, (c) unauthorized modification or misuse, (d) operation outside of the published environmental specifications for the product, or (e) improper site preparation or maintenance.
TO THE EXTENT ALLOWED BY LOCAL LAW, THE ABOVE WARRANTIES ARE EXCLUSIVE AND NO
OTHER WARRANTY OR CONDITION, WHETHER WRITTEN OR ORAL, IS EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED
AND HP SPECIFICALLY DISCLAIMS ANY IMPLIED WARRANTIES OR CONDITIONS OF
MERCHANTABILITY, SATISFACTORY QUALITY, AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. Some countries/regions, states or provinces do not allow limitations on the duration of an implied warranty, so the above limitation or exclusion might not apply to you. This warranty gives you specific legal rights and you might also have other rights that vary from country/region to country/region, state to state, or province to province.
HP's limited warranty is valid in any country/region or locality where HP has a support presence for this product and where HP has marketed this product. The level of warranty service you receive may vary according to local standards. HP will not alter form, fit or function of the product to make it operate in a country/region for which it was never intended to function for legal or regulatory reasons.
TO THE EXTENT ALLOWED BY LOCAL LAW, THE REMEDIES IN THIS WARRANTY STATEMENT ARE
YOUR SOLE AND EXCLUSIVE REMEDIES. EXCEPT AS INDICATED ABOVE, IN NO EVENT WILL HP OR
ITS SUPPLIERS BE LIABLE FOR LOSS OF DATA OR FOR DIRECT, SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL,
CONSEQUENTIAL (INCLUDING LOST PROFIT OR DATA), OR OTHER DAMAGE, WHETHER BASED
IN CONTRACT, TORT, OR OTHERWISE. Some countries/regions, states or provinces do not allow the exclusion or limitation of incidental or consequential damages, so the above limitation or exclusion may not apply to you.
THE WARRANTY TERMS CONTAINED IN THIS STATEMENT, EXCEPT TO THE EXTENT LAWFULLY
PERMITTED, DO NOT EXCLUDE, RESTRICT OR MODIFY AND ARE IN ADDITION TO THE
MANDATORY STATUTORY RIGHTS APPLICABLE TO THE SALE OF THIS PRODUCT TO YOU.
328 Appendix B Service and support ENWW
HP's Premium Protection Warranty: LaserJet print cartridge limited warranty statement
This HP product is warranted to be free from defects in materials and workmanship.
This warranty does not apply to products that (a) have been refilled, refurbished, remanufactured or tampered with in any way, (b) experience problems resulting from misuse, improper storage, or operation outside of the published environmental specifications for the printer product or (c) exhibit wear from ordinary use.
To obtain warranty service, please return the product to place of purchase (with a written description of the problem and print samples) or contact HP customer support. At HP's option, HP will either replace products that prove to be defective or refund your purchase price.
TO THE EXTENT ALLOWED BY LOCAL LAW, THE ABOVE WARRANTY IS EXCLUSIVE AND NO
OTHER WARRANTY OR CONDITION, WHETHER WRITTEN OR ORAL, IS EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED
AND HP SPECIFICALLY DISCLAIMS ANY IMPLIED WARRANTIES OR CONDITIONS OF
MERCHANTABILITY, SATISFACTORY QUALITY, AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.
TO THE EXTENT ALLOWED BY LOCAL LAW, IN NO EVENT WILL HP OR ITS SUPPLIERS BE LIABLE
FOR DIRECT, SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL, CONSEQUENTIAL (INCLUDING LOST PROFIT OR DATA), OR
OTHER DAMAGE, WHETHER BASED IN CONTRACT, TORT, OR OTHERWISE.
THE WARRANTY TERMS CONTAINED IN THIS STATEMENT, EXCEPT TO THE EXTENT LAWFULLY
PERMITTED, DO NOT EXCLUDE, RESTRICT OR MODIFY AND ARE IN ADDITION TO THE
MANDATORY STATUTORY RIGHTS APPLICABLE TO THE SALE OF THIS PRODUCT TO YOU.
ENWW HP's Premium Protection Warranty: LaserJet print cartridge limited warranty statement 329
Color LaserJet Fuser Kit, Transfer Kit, and Roller Kit
Limited Warranty Statement
This HP product is warranted to be free from defects in materials and workmanship until the printer provides a low-life indicator on the control panel.
This warranty does not apply to products that (a) have been refurbished, remanufactured or tampered with in any way, (b) experience problems resulting from misuse, improper storage, or operation outside of the published environmental specifications for the printer product or (c) exhibit wear from ordinary use.
To obtain warranty service, please return the product to place of purchase (with a written description of the problem) or contact HP customer support. At HP’s option, HP will either replace products that prove to be defective or refund your purchase price.
TO THE EXTENT ALLOWED BY LOCAL LAW, THE ABOVE WARRANTY IS EXCLUSIVE AND NO
OTHER WARRANTY OR CONDITION, WHETHER WRITTEN OR ORAL, IS EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED
AND HP SPECIFICALLY DISCLAIMS ANY IMPLIED WARRANTIES OR CONDITIONS OF
MERCHANTABILITY, SATISFACTORY QUALITY, AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.
TO THE EXTENT ALLOWED BY LOCAL LAW, IN NO EVENT WILL HP OR ITS SUPPLIERS BE LIABLE
FOR DIRECT, SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL, CONSEQUENTIAL (INCLUDING LOST PROFIT OR DATA), OR
OTHER DAMAGE, WHETHER BASED IN CONTRACT, TORT, OR OTHERWISE.
THE WARRANTY TERMS CONTAINED IN THIS STATEMENT, EXCEPT TO THE EXTENT LAWFULLY
PERMITTED, DO NOT EXCLUDE, RESTRICT OR MODIFY AND ARE IN ADDITION TO THE
MANDATORY STATUTORY RIGHTS APPLICABLE TO THE SALE OF THIS PRODUCT TO YOU.
330 Appendix B Service and support ENWW
Data stored on the print cartridge
The HP print cartridges used with this product contain a memory chip that assists in the operation of the product.
In addition, this memory chip collects a limited set of information about the usage of the product, which might include the following: the date when the print cartridge was first installed, the date when the print cartridge was last used, the number of pages printed using the print cartridge, the page coverage, the printing modes used, any printing errors that might have occurred, and the product model. This information helps HP design future products to meet our customers' printing needs.
The data collected from the print cartridge memory chip does not contain information that can be used to identify a customer or user of the print cartridge or their product.
HP collects a sampling of the memory chips from print cartridges returned to HP's free return and recycling program (HP Planet Partners: www.hp.com/recycle ). The memory chips from this sampling are read and studied in order to improve future HP products. HP partners who assist in recycling this print cartridge might have access to this data, as well.
Any third party possessing the print cartridge might have access to the anonymous information on the memory chip. If you prefer to not allow access to this information, you can render the chip inoperable.
However, after you render the memory chip inoperable, the memory chip cannot be used in an HP product.
ENWW Data stored on the print cartridge 331
End User License Agreement
PLEASE READ CAREFULLY BEFORE USING THIS SOFTWARE PRODUCT: This End-User License
Agreement (“EULA”) is a contract between (a) you (either an individual or the entity you represent) and
(b) Hewlett-Packard Company (“HP”) that governs your use of the software product (“Software”). This
EULA does not apply if there is a separate license agreement between you and HP or its suppliers for the Software, including a license agreement in online documentation. The term “Software” may include
(i) associated media, (ii) a user guide and other printed materials, and (iii) “online” or electronic documentation (collectively “User Documentation”).
RIGHTS IN THE SOFTWARE ARE OFFERED ONLY ON THE CONDITION THAT YOU AGREE TO ALL
TERMS AND CONDITIONS OF THIS EULA. BY INSTALLING, COPYING, DOWNLOADING, OR
OTHERWISE USING THE SOFTWARE, YOU AGREE TO BE BOUND BY THIS EULA. IF YOU DO NOT
ACCEPT THIS EULA, DO NOT INSTALL, DOWNLOAD, OR OTHERWISE USE THE SOFTWARE. IF
YOU PURCHASED THE SOFTWARE BUT DO NOT AGREE TO THIS EULA, PLEASE RETURN THE
SOFTWARE TO YOUR PLACE OF PURCHASE WITHIN FOURTEEN DAYS FOR A REFUND OF THE
PURCHASE PRICE; IF THE SOFTWARE IS INSTALLED ON OR MADE AVAILABLE WITH ANOTHER
HP PRODUCT, YOU MAY RETURN THE ENTIRE UNUSED PRODUCT.
1.
THIRD PARTY SOFTWARE. The Software may include, in addition to HP proprietary software (“HP
Software”), software under licenses from third parties (“Third Party Software” and “Third Party
License”). Any Third Party Software is licensed to you subject to the terms and conditions of the corresponding Third Party License. Generally, the Third Party License is in a file such as
“license.txt” or a “readme” file. You should contact HP support if you cannot find a Third Party
License. If the Third Party Licenses include licenses that provide for the availability of source code
(such as the GNU General Public License) and the corresponding source code is not included with the Software, then check the product support pages of HP's website (hp.com) to learn how to obtain such source code.
2.
LICENSE RIGHTS. You will have the following rights provided you comply with all terms and conditions of this EULA:
a. Use. HP grants you a license to Use one copy of the HP Software. “Use” means installing, copying, storing, loading, executing, displaying, or otherwise using the HP Software. You may not modify the HP Software or disable any licensing or control feature of the
HP Software. If this Software is provided by HP for Use with an imaging or printing product
(for example, if the Software is a printer driver, firmware, or add-on), the HP Software may only be used with such product (“HP Product”). Additional restrictions on Use may appear in the User Documentation. You may not separate component parts of the HP Software for Use.
You do not have the right to distribute the HP Software.
b. Copying. Your right to copy means you may make archival or back-up copies of the
HP Software, provided each copy contains all the original HP Software’s proprietary notices and is used only for back-up purposes.
3.
UPGRADES. To Use HP Software provided by HP as an upgrade, update, or supplement
(collectively “Upgrade”), you must first be licensed for the original HP Software identified by HP as eligible for the Upgrade. To the extent the Upgrade supersedes the original HP Software, you may no longer use such HP Software. This EULA applies to each Upgrade unless HP provides other terms with the Upgrade. In case of a conflict between this EULA and such other terms, the other terms will prevail.
332 Appendix B Service and support ENWW
ENWW
4.
TRANSFER.
a. Third Party Transfer. The initial end user of the HP Software may make a one-time transfer of the HP Software to another end user. Any transfer will include all component parts, media,
User Documentation, this EULA, and if applicable, the Certificate of Authenticity. The transfer may not be an indirect transfer, such as a consignment. Prior to the transfer, the end user receiving the transferred Software will agree to this EULA. Upon transfer of the HP Software, your license is automatically terminated.
b. Restrictions. You may not rent, lease or lend the HP Software or Use the HP Software for commercial timesharing or bureau use. You may not sublicense, assign or otherwise transfer the HP Software except as expressly provided in this EULA.
5.
PROPRIETARY RIGHTS. All intellectual property rights in the Software and User Documentation are owned by HP or its suppliers and are protected by law, including applicable copyright, trade secret, patent, and trademark laws. You will not remove any product identification, copyright notice, or proprietary restriction from the Software.
6.
LIMITATION ON REVERSE ENGINEERING. You may not reverse engineer, decompile, or disassemble the HP Software, except and only to the extent that the right to do so is allowed under applicable law.
7.
CONSENT TO USE OF DATA. HP and its affiliates may collect and use technical information you provide in relation to (i) your Use of the Software or the HP Product, or (ii) the provision of support services related to the Software or the HP Product. All such information will be subject to HP’s privacy policy. HP will not use such information in a form that personally identifies you except to the extent necessary to enhance your Use or provide support services.
8.
LIMITATION OF LIABILITY. Notwithstanding any damages that you might incur, the entire liability of HP and its suppliers under this EULA and your exclusive remedy under this EULA will be limited to the greater of the amount actually paid by you for the Product or U.S. $5.00. TO THE
MAXIMUM EXTENT PERMITTED BY APPLICABLE LAW, IN NO EVENT WILL HP OR ITS SUPPLIERS
BE LIABLE FOR ANY SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL, INDIRECT, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES
(INCLUDING DAMAGES FOR LOST PROFITS, LOST DATA, BUSINESS INTERRUPTION,
PERSONAL INJURY, OR LOSS OF PRIVACY) RELATED IN ANY WAY TO THE USE OF OR
INABILITY TO USE THE SOFTWARE, EVEN IF HP OR ANY SUPPLIER HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE
POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES AND EVEN IF THE ABOVE REMEDY FAILS OF ITS ESSENTIAL
PURPOSE. Some states or other jurisdictions do not allow the exclusion or limitation of incidental or consequential damages, so the above limitation or exclusion may not apply to you.
9.
U.S. GOVERNMENT CUSTOMERS. Software was developed entirely at private expense. All
Software is commercial computer software within the meaning of the applicable acquisition regulations. Accordingly, pursuant to US FAR 48 CFR 12.212 and DFAR 48 CFR 227.7202, use, duplication and disclosure of the Software by or for the U.S. Government or a U.S. Government subcontractor is subject solely to the terms and conditions set forth in this End User License
Agreement, except for provisions which are contrary to applicable mandatory federal laws.
10.
COMPLIANCE WITH EXPORT LAWS. You will comply with all laws, rules, and regulations (i) applicable to the export or import of the Software, or (ii) restricting the Use of the Software, including any restrictions on nuclear, chemical, or biological weapons proliferation.
11.
RESERVATION OF RIGHTS. HP and its suppliers reserve all rights not expressly granted to you in this EULA.
© 2009 Hewlett-Packard Development Company, L.P.
Rev. 04/09
End User License Agreement 333
OpenSSL
This product includes software developed by the OpenSSL Project for use in the OpenSSL Toolkit
(http://www.openssl.org/)
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE OpenSSL PROJECT ``AS IS'' AND ANY EXPRESSED OR
IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF
MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT
SHALL THE OpenSSL PROJECT OR ITS CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT,
INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT
LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES;
LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON
ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING
NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE,
EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.
This product includes cryptographic software written by Eric Young ([email protected]). This product includes software written by Tim Hudson ([email protected]).
334 Appendix B Service and support ENWW
Customer self-repair warranty service
HP products are designed with many Customer Self Repair (CSR) parts to minimize repair time and allow for greater flexibility in performing defective parts replacement. If during the diagnosis period,
HP identifies that the repair can be accomplished by the use of a CSR part, HP will ship that part directly to you for replacement. There are two categories of CSR parts: 1) Parts for which customer self repair is mandatory. If you request HP to replace these parts, you will be charged for the travel and labor costs of this service. 2) Parts for which customer self repair is optional. These parts are also designed for Customer Self Repair. If, however, you require that HP replace them for you, this may be done at no additional charge under the type of warranty service designated for your product.
Based on availability and where geography permits, CSR parts will be shipped for next business day delivery. Same-day or four-hour delivery may be offered at an additional charge where geography permits. If assistance is required, you can call the HP Technical Support Center and a technician will help you over the phone. HP specifies in the materials shipped with a replacement CSR part whether a defective part must be returned to HP. In cases where it is required to return the defective part to HP, you must ship the defective part back to HP within a defined period of time, normally five (5) business days. The defective part must be returned with the associated documentation in the provided shipping material. Failure to return the defective part may result in HP billing you for the replacement. With a customer self repair, HP will pay all shipping and part return costs and determine the courier/carrier to be used.
ENWW Customer self-repair warranty service 335
Customer support
Get telephone support for your country/region
Have the product name, serial number, date of purchase, and problem description ready.
Get 24-hour Internet support
Get support for products used with a Macintosh computer
Download software utilities, drivers, and electronic information
Order additional HP service or maintenance agreements
Register your product
Country/region phone numbers are on the flyer that was in the box with your product or at www.hp.com/support/ .
www.hp.com/support/cljcm4540mfp www.hp.com/go/macosx www.hp.com/go/cljcm4540mfp_software www.hp.com/go/carepack www.register.hp.com
336 Appendix B Service and support ENWW
C Product specifications
●
●
Power consumption, electrical specifications, and acoustic emissions
●
ENWW 337
Physical specifications
Table C-1 Product dimensions
Product
CM4540 MFP
CM4540f MFP
CM4540fskm MFP
Height Depth
575 mm (22.6 in) 617 mm (24.3 in)
1119 mm (44.1 in) 668 mm (26.3 in)
1119 mm (44.1 in) 668 mm (26.3 in)
Width
827 mm (32.5 in)
849 mm (33.4 in)
Weight
54.8 kg (120.5 lb)
75.7 kg (166.5 lb)
1012 mm (39.8 in) 88.6 kg (195.0 lb)
Power consumption, electrical specifications, and acoustic emissions
See www.hp.com/go/cljcm4540mfp_regulatory for current information.
CAUTION:
Power requirements are based on the country/region where the product is sold. Do not convert operating voltages. This will damage the product and void the product warranty.
Environmental specifications
Environmental condition
Temperature (product and print cartridge)
Relative humidity
Altitude
Recommended
17° to 27°C (62.6° to 80.6°F)
30% to 70% relative humidity (RH)
N/A
Allowed
10° to 30°C (50° to 86°F)
10% to 80% RH
0 m (0 ft) to 3000 m (9842 ft)
338 Appendix C Product specifications ENWW
D Regulatory information
●
●
Environmental product stewardship program
●
●
Declaration of Conformity (fax models)
●
●
Additional statements for telecom (fax) products
ENWW 339
FCC regulations
This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class A digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy, and if not installed and used in accordance with the instruction manual, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. Operation of this equipment in a residential area is likely to cause harmful interference in which case the user will be required to correct the interference at his own expense.
NOTE:
Any changes or modifications to the printer that are not expressly approved by HP could void the user’s authority to operate this equipment.
Use of a shielded interface cable is required to comply with the Class A limits of Part 15 of FCC rules.
340 Appendix D Regulatory information ENWW
Environmental product stewardship program
Protecting the environment
Hewlett-Packard Company is committed to providing quality products in an environmentally sound manner. This product has been designed with several attributes to minimize impacts on our environment.
Ozone production
This product generates no appreciable ozone gas (O
3
).
Power consumption
Power usage drops significantly while in Ready and Sleep mode, which saves natural resources and saves money without affecting the high performance of this product. To determine the ENERGY STAR® qualification status for this product, see the Product Data Sheet or Specifications Sheet. Qualified products are also listed at: www.hp.com/go/energystar
Paper use
This product’s optional automatic duplex feature (two-sided printing) and N-up printing (multiple pages printed on one page) capability can reduce paper usage and the resulting demands on natural resources.
Plastics
Plastic parts over 25 grams are marked according to international standards that enhance the ability to identify plastics for recycling purposes at the end of the product’s life.
HP LaserJet print supplies
It’s easy to return and recycle your HP LaserJet print cartridges after use—free of charge—with
HP Planet Partners. Multilingual program information and instructions are included in every new
HP LaserJet print cartridge and supplies package. You help reduce the toll on the environment further when you return multiple cartridges together rather than separately.
HP is committed to providing inventive, high-quality products and services that are environmentally sound, from product design and manufacturing to distribution, customer use and recycling. When you participate in the HP Planet Partners program, we ensure your HP LaserJet print cartridges are recycled properly, processing them to recover plastics and metals for new products and diverting millions of tons of waste from landfills. Since this cartridge is being recycled and used in new materials, it will not be returned to you. Thank you for being environmentally responsible!
NOTE:
Use the return label to return original HP LaserJet print cartridges only. Please do not use this label for HP inkjet cartridges, non-HP cartridges, refilled or remanufactured cartridges or warranty returns. For information about recycling your HP inkjet cartridges please go to http://www.hp.com/ recycle .
ENWW Environmental product stewardship program 341
Return and recycling instructions
United States and Puerto Rico
The enclosed label in the HP LaserJet toner cartridge box is for the return and recycling of one or more
HP LaserJet print cartridges after use. Please follow the applicable instructions below.
Multiple returns (more than one cartridge)
1.
Package each HP LaserJet print cartridge in its original box and bag.
2.
Tape the boxes together using strapping or packaging tape. The package can weigh up to 31 kg
(70 lb).
3.
Use a single pre-paid shipping label.
OR
1.
Use your own suitable box, or request a free bulk collection box from www.hp.com/recycle or
1-800-340-2445 (holds up to 31 kg (70 lb) of HP LaserJet print cartridges).
2.
Use a single pre-paid shipping label.
Single returns
1.
Package the HP LaserJet print cartridge in its original bag and box.
2.
Place the shipping label on the front of the box.
Shipping
For US and Puerto Rico HP LaserJet print cartridge recycling returns, use the pre-paid, pre-addressed shipping label contained in the box. To use the UPS label, give the package to the UPS driver during your next delivery or pick-up, or take it to an authorized UPS drop-off center. (Requested UPS Ground pickup will be charged normal pick-up rates) For the location of your local UPS drop-off center, call
1-800-PICKUPS or visit www.ups.com
.
If you are returning the package with the FedEx label, give the package to either the U.S. Postal Service carrier or FedEx driver during your next pick-up or delivery. (Requested FedEx Ground pickup will be charged normal pick-up rates). Or, you can drop off your packaged print cartridge(s) at any U.S. Post
Office or any FedEx shipping center or store. For the location of your nearest U.S. Post Office, please call 1-800-ASK-USPS or visit www.usps.com
. For the location of your nearest FedEx shipping center/ store, please call 1-800-GOFEDEX or visit www.fedex.com
.
For more information, or to order additional labels or boxes for bulk returns, visit www.hp.com/recycle or call 1-800-340-2445. Information subject to change without notice.
Residents of Alaska and Hawaii
Do not use the UPS label. Call 1-800-340-2445 for information and instructions. The U.S. Postal
Service provides no-cost cartridge return transportation services under an arrangement with HP for
Alaska and Hawaii.
342 Appendix D Regulatory information ENWW
Non-U.S. returns
To participate in HP Planet Partners return and recycling program, just follow the simple directions in the recycling guide (found inside the packaging of your new product supply item) or visit www.hp.com/recycle . Select your country/region for information on how to return your HP LaserJet printing supplies.
Paper
This product is capable of using recycled papers when the paper meets the guidelines outlined in the
HP LaserJet Printer Family Print Media Guide. This product is suitable for the use of recycled paper according to EN12281:2002.
Material restrictions
This HP product does not contain added mercury.
This HP product contains a battery that might require special handling at end-of-life. The batteries contained in or supplied by Hewlett-Packard for this product include the following:
HP Color LaserJet Enterprise CM4540 MFP Series
Type
Weight
Location
User-removable
Carbon monofluoride lithium
0.8 g
On formatter board
No
For recycling information, you can go to www.hp.com/recycle , or contact your local authorities or the
Electronics Industries Alliance: www.eiae.org
.
ENWW Environmental product stewardship program 343
Disposal of waste equipment by users in private households in the
European Union
This symbol on the product or on its packaging indicates that this product must not be disposed of with your other household waste. Instead, it is your responsibility to dispose of your waste equipment by handing it over to a designated collection point for the recycling of waste electrical and electronic equipment. The separate collection and recycling of your waste equipment at the time of disposal will help to conserve natural resources and ensure that it is recycled in a manner that protects human health and the environment. For more information about where you can drop off your waste equipment for recycling, please contact your local city office, your household waste disposal service or the shop where you purchased the product.
Chemical substances
HP is committed to providing our customers with information about the chemical substances in our products as needed to comply with legal requirements such as REACH (Regulation EC No 1907/2006 of the European Parliament and the Council). A chemical information report for this product can be found at: www.hp.com/go/reach .
Material Safety Data Sheet (MSDS)
Material Safety Data Sheets (MSDS) for supplies containing chemical substances (for example, toner) can be obtained by accessing the HP Web site at www.hp.com/go/msds or www.hp.com/hpinfo/ community/environment/productinfo/safety .
For more information
To obtain information about these environmental topics:
●
Product environmental profile sheet for this and many related HP products
●
HP’s commitment to the environment
●
HP’s environmental management system
●
HP’s end-of-life product return and recycling program
●
Material Safety Data Sheets
Visit www.hp.com/go/environment or www.hp.com/hpinfo/globalcitizenship/environment .
344 Appendix D Regulatory information ENWW
Declaration of Conformity
Declaration of Conformity
Manufacturer's Name:
Manufacturer's Address:
according to ISO/IEC 17050-1 and EN 17050-1
Hewlett-Packard Company
11311 Chinden Boulevard
Boise, Idaho 83714-1021, USA
declares, that the product
Product Name:
Regulatory Model Number
2)
HP Color LaserJet Enterprise CM4540 MFP
BOISB-0806-01
Including:
DoC#: BOISB-0806-01-rel.1.0
CC422A – 500-sheet paper feeder and cabinet
CC423A – 3x500-sheet paper feeder and stand
CC424A – 900-sheet 3-bin Stapling Mailbox
Product Options:
CC425A – 1x500-sheet paper feeder
ALL
Print Cartridges:
CE260A, CE264X, CF031A, CF032A, CF033A
conforms to the following Product Specifications:
SAFETY:
IEC 60950-1:2001 / EN60950-1: 2001 +A11
EMC:
IEC 60825-1:1993 +A1 +A2 / EN 60825-1:1994 +A1 +A2 (Class 1 Laser/LED Product)
GB4943-2001
CISPR22:2005 +A1/ EN55022:2006 +A1 - Class A 1) ,3)
EN 61000-3-2:2006
EN 61000-3-3:1995 +A1 +A2
EN 55024:1998 +A1 +A2
FCC Title 47 CFR, Part 15 Class A 1) ,3) / ICES-003, Issue 4
GB9254-1998, GB17625.1-2003
Supplementary Information:
The product herewith complies with the requirements of the EMC Directive 2004/108/EC and the Low Voltage Directive 2006/95/EC, and carries the CE-Marking accordingly.
ENWW Declaration of Conformity 345
This Device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two Conditions: (1) this device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.
1.
The product was tested in a typical configuration with Hewlett-Packard Personal Computer Systems.
2.
For regulatory purposes, this product is assigned a Regulatory model number. This number should not be confused with the product name or the product number(s).
3.
The product meets the requirements of EN55022 & CNS13438 Class A in which case the following applies: “Warning – This is a class A product. In a domestic environment this product may cause radio interference in which case the user may be required to take adequate measures.”
Boise, Idaho USA
August 17, 2010
For regulatory topics only:
European Contact:
USA Contact:
Your Local Hewlett-Packard Sales and Service Office or Hewlett-Packard GmbH, Department HQ-
TRE / Standards Europe, Herrenberger Strasse 140, D-71034, Böblingen (FAX: +49-7031-14-3143) www.hp.com/go/certificates
Product Regulations Manager, Hewlett-Packard Company, PO Box 15, Mail Stop 160, Boise, Idaho
83707-0015 (Phone: 208-396-6000)
346 Appendix D Regulatory information ENWW
Declaration of Conformity (fax models)
Manufacturer's Name:
Manufacturer's Address:
Declaration of Conformity
according to ISO/IEC 17050-1 and EN 17050-1
Hewlett-Packard Company
11311 Chinden Boulevard
Boise, Idaho 83714-1021, USA
declares, that the product
Product Name:
HP Color LaserJet Enterprise CM4540f MFP
Regulatory Model Number
2)
HP Color LaserJet Enterprise CM4540fskm MFP
BOISB-0806-02
Including:
DoC#: BOISB-0806-02-rel.1.0
CC422A – 500-sheet paper feeder and cabinet
CC423A – 3x500-sheet paper feeder and stand
CC424A – 900-sheet 3-bin Stapling Mailbox
CC425A – 1x500-sheet paper feeder
Product Options:
BOISB-0703-00 – Fax Module
ALL
Print Cartridges:
CE260A, CE264X, CF031A, CF032A, CF033A
conforms to the following Product Specifications:
SAFETY:
IEC 60950-1:2001 / EN60950-1: 2001 +A11
EMC:
IEC 60825-1:1993 +A1 +A2 / EN 60825-1:1994 +A1 +A2 (Class 1 Laser/LED Product)
GB4943-2001
CISPR22:2005 +A1/ EN55022:2006 +A1 - Class A 1) ,3)
EN 61000-3-2:2006
EN 61000-3-3:1995 +A1 +A2
EN 55024:1998 +A1 +A2
FCC Title 47 CFR, Part 15 Class A 1) ,3) / ICES-003, Issue 4
TELECOM:
GB9254-1998, GB17625.1-2003
ES 203 021; FCC Title 47 CFR, Part 68 4)
Supplementary Information:
The product herewith complies with the requirements of the EMC Directive 2004/108/EC and the Low Voltage Directive 2006/95/EC, the
R&TTE; Directive 1999/5/EC (Annex II), and carries the CE-Marking accordingly.
ENWW Declaration of Conformity (fax models) 347
This Device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two Conditions: (1) this device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.
1.
The product was tested in a typical configuration with Hewlett-Packard Personal Computer Systems.
2.
For regulatory purposes, this product is assigned a Regulatory model number. This number should not be confused with the product name or the product number(s).
3.
The product meets the requirements of EN55022 & CNS13438 Class A in which case the following applies: “Warning – This is a class A product. In a domestic environment this product may cause radio interference in which case the user may be required to take adequate measures.”
4.
Telecom approvals and standards appropriate for the target countries/regions have been applied to this product, in addition to those listed above.
5.
This product uses an analog fax accessory module which Regulatory Model numbers are: BOISB-0903-00 (US-LIU) or BOISB-0903-01
(EURO LIU), as needed to meet technical regulatory requirements for the countries/regions this product will be sold.
6.
5. This product uses an analog fax accessory module which Regulatory Model number is: BOISB-0703-00 as needed to meet technical regulatory requirements for the countries/regions this product will be sold.
Boise, Idaho USA
August 17, 2010
For regulatory topics only:
European Contact:
USA Contact:
Your Local Hewlett-Packard Sales and Service Office or Hewlett-Packard GmbH, Department HQ-
TRE / Standards Europe, Herrenberger Strasse 140, D-71034, Böblingen (FAX: +49-7031-14-3143) www.hp.com/go/certificates
Product Regulations Manager, Hewlett-Packard Company, PO Box 15, Mail Stop 160, Boise, Idaho
83707-0015 (Phone: 208-396-6000)
348 Appendix D Regulatory information ENWW
Safety statements
Laser safety
The Center for Devices and Radiological Health (CDRH) of the U.S. Food and Drug Administration has implemented regulations for laser products manufactured since August 1, 1976. Compliance is mandatory for products marketed in the United States. The device is certified as a “Class 1” laser product under the U.S. Department of Health and Human Services (DHHS) Radiation Performance
Standard according to the Radiation Control for Health and Safety Act of 1968. Since radiation emitted inside the device is completely confined within protective housings and external covers, the laser beam cannot escape during any phase of normal user operation.
WARNING!
Using controls, making adjustments, or performing procedures other than those specified in this user guide may result in exposure to hazardous radiation.
Canadian DOC regulations
Complies with Canadian EMC Class A requirements.
« Conforme à la classe A des normes canadiennes de compatibilité électromagnétiques. « CEM ». »
VCCI statement (Japan)
Power cord instructions
Make sure your power source is adequate for the product voltage rating. The voltage rating is on the product label. The product uses either 100-127 Vac or 220-240 Vac and 50/60 Hz.
Connect the power cord between the product and a grounded AC outlet.
CAUTION:
To prevent damage to the product, use only the power cord that is provided with the product.
Power cord statement (Japan)
ENWW Safety statements 349
EMC statement (China)
EMC statement (Korea)
EMI statement (Taiwan)
Laser statement for Finland
Luokan 1 laserlaite
Klass 1 Laser Apparat
HP Color LaserJet CM4540, CM4540f, CM4540fskm, laserkirjoitin on käyttäjän kannalta turvallinen luokan 1 laserlaite. Normaalissa käytössä kirjoittimen suojakotelointi estää lasersäteen pääsyn laitteen ulkopuolelle. Laitteen turvallisuusluokka on määritetty standardin EN 60825-1 (2007) mukaisesti.
VAROITUS !
Laitteen käyttäminen muulla kuin käyttöohjeessa mainitulla tavalla saattaa altistaa käyttäjän turvallisuusluokan 1 ylittävälle näkymättömälle lasersäteilylle.
VARNING !
Om apparaten används på annat sätt än i bruksanvisning specificerats, kan användaren utsättas för osynlig laserstrålning, som överskrider gränsen för laserklass 1.
HUOLTO
HP Color LaserJet CM4540, CM4540f, CM4540fskm - kirjoittimen sisällä ei ole käyttäjän huollettavissa olevia kohteita. Laitteen saa avata ja huoltaa ainoastaan sen huoltamiseen koulutettu henkilö. Tällaiseksi huoltotoimenpiteeksi ei katsota väriainekasetin vaihtamista, paperiradan puhdistusta tai muita käyttäjän käsikirjassa lueteltuja, käyttäjän tehtäväksi tarkoitettuja ylläpitotoimia, jotka voidaan suorittaa ilman erikoistyökaluja.
350 Appendix D Regulatory information ENWW
VARO !
Mikäli kirjoittimen suojakotelo avataan, olet alttiina näkymättömällelasersäteilylle laitteen ollessa toiminnassa. Älä katso säteeseen.
VARNING !
Om laserprinterns skyddshölje öppnas då apparaten är i funktion, utsättas användaren för osynlig laserstrålning. Betrakta ej strålen.
Tiedot laitteessa käytettävän laserdiodin säteilyominaisuuksista: Aallonpituus 775-795 nm Teho 5 m W
Luokan 3B laser.
Substances Table (China)
Restriction on Hazardous Substances statement (Turkey)
Türkiye Cumhuriyeti: EEE Yönetmeliğine Uygundur
ENWW Safety statements 351
Additional statements for telecom (fax) products
EU Statement for Telecom Operation
This product is intended to be connected to the analog Public Switched Telecommunication Networks
(PSTN) of European Economic Area (EEA) countries/regions.
It meets requirements of EU R&TTE Directive 1999/5/EC (Annex II) and carries appropriate CE conformity marking.
For more details see Declaration of Conformity issued by the manufacturer in another section of this manual.
However due to differences between individual national PSTNs the product may not guarantee unconditional assurance of successful operation on every PSTN termination point. Network compatibility depends on the correct setting being selected by the customer in preparation of its connection to the PSTN. Please follow the instructions provided in the user manual.
If you experience network compatibility issues, please contact your equipment supplier or Hewlett-
Packard help desk in the country/region of operation.
Connecting to a PSTN termination point may be the subject of additional requirements set out by the local PSTN operator.
New Zealand Telecom Statements
The grant of a Telepermit for any item of terminal equipment indicates only that Telecom has accepted that the item complies with minimum conditions for connection to its network. It indicates no endorsement of the product by Telecom, nor does it provide any sort of warranty. Above all, it provides no assurance that any item will work correctly in all respects with another item of Telepermitted equipment of a different make or model, nor does it imply that any product is compatible with all of
Telecom’s network services.
This equipment may not provide for the effective hand-over of a call to another device connected to the same line.
This equipment shall not be set up to make automatic calls to the Telecom “111” Emergency Service.
This product has not been tested to ensure compatibility with the FaxAbility distinctive ring service for
New Zealand.
Additional FCC statement for telecom products (US)
This equipment complies with Part 68 of the FCC rules and the requirements adopted by the ACTA. On the back of this equipment is a label that contains, among other information, a product identifier in the format US:AAAEQ##TXXXX. If requested, this number must be provided to the telephone company.
The REN is used to determine the quantity of devices, which may be connected to the telephone line.
Excessive RENs on the telephone line may result in the devices not ringing in response to an incoming call. In most, but not all, areas, the sum of the RENs should not exceed five (5.0). To be certain of the number of devices that may be connected to the line, as determined by the total RENs, contact the telephone company to determine the maximum REN for the calling area.
This equipment uses the following USOC jacks: RJ11C.
352 Appendix D Regulatory information ENWW
An FCC-compliant telephone cord and modular plug is provided with this equipment. This equipment is designed to be connected to the telephone network or premises wiring using a compatible modular jack, which is Part 68 compliant. This equipment cannot be used on telephone company-provided coin service. Connection to Party Line Service is subject to state tariffs.
If this equipment causes harm to the telephone network, the telephone company will notify you in advance that temporary discontinuance of service may be required. If advance notice is not practical, the telephone company will notify the customer as soon as possible. Also, you will be advised of your right to file a complaint with the FCC if you believe it is necessary.
The telephone company may make changes in its facilities, equipment, operations, or procedures that could affect the operation of the equipment. If this happens, the telephone company will provide advance notice in order for you to make the necessary modifications in order to maintain uninterrupted service.
If trouble is experienced with this equipment, please see the numbers in this manual for repair and (or) warranty information. If the trouble is causing harm to the telephone network, the telephone company may request you remove the equipment from the network until the problem is resolved.
The customer can do the following repairs: Replace any original equipment that came with the device.
This includes the print cartridge, the supports for trays and bins, the power cord, and the telephone cord. It is recommended that the customer install an AC surge arrestor in the AC outlet to which this device is connected. This is to avoid damage to the equipment caused by local lightning strikes and other electrical surges.
Telephone Consumer Protection Act (US)
The Telephone Consumer Protection Act of 1991 makes it unlawful for any person to use a computer or other electronic device, including fax machines, to send any message unless such message clearly contains, in a margin at the top or bottom of each transmitted page or on the first page of the transmission, the date and time it is sent and an identification of the business, other entity, or individual sending the message and the telephone number of the sending machine or such business, or other entity, or individual. (The telephone number provided cannot be a 900 number or any other number for which charges exceed local or long distance transmission charges).
Industry Canada CS-03 requirements
Notice: The Industry Canada label identifies certified equipment. This certification means the equipment meets certain telecommunications network protective, operational, and safety requirements as prescribed in the appropriate Terminal Equipment Technical Requirement document(s). The
Department does not guarantee the equipment will operate to the user’s satisfaction. Before installing this equipment, users should ensure that it is permissible for the equipment to be connected to the facilities of the local telecommunications company. The equipment must also be installed using an acceptable method of connection. The customer should be aware that compliance with the above conditions may not prevent degradation of service in some situations. Repairs to certified equipment should be coordinated by a representative designated by the supplier. Any repairs or alterations made by the user to this equipment, or equipment malfunctions, may give the telecommunications company cause to request the user to disconnect the equipment. Users should ensure for their own protection that the electrical ground connections of the power utility, telephone lines, and internal metallic water pipe system, if present, are connected together. This precaution can be particularly important in rural areas.
CAUTION:
Users should not attempt to make such connections themselves, but should contact the appropriate electric inspection authority, or electrician, as appropriate. The Ringer Equivalence
Number (REN) of this device is 0.0.
ENWW Additional statements for telecom (fax) products 353
Notice: The Ringer Equivalence Number (REN) assigned to each terminal device provides an indication of the maximum number of terminals allowed to be connected to a telephone interface. The termination on an interface may consist of any combination of devices subject only to the requirement that the sum of the Ringer Equivalence Number of all the devices does not exceed five (5.0). The standard connecting arrangement code (telephone jack type) for equipment with direct connections to the telephone network is CA11A.
Japan Telecom Mark
A08-0138004
354 Appendix D Regulatory information ENWW
Index
A
accessories
address books, e-mail
Administration menu, control
B
Backup/Restore menu, control
billing code report
Billing Codes Report
bins, output
black and white
Blocked Fax List
blocked fax list report
booklets
books
ENWW both sides, printing on
browser requirements
HP embedded Web Server
browser, Web
business graphics
buttons, control panel
C
cable, USB
Calibrate/Cleaning menu, control
cancel
canceling
canceling a print request
cartridges
cartridges, print
cleaning
product 279 scanner glass 179, 279
CMYK Values
collate
color
Pantone® matching 173 print color samples 173
printing in grayscale
color options
Color Samples for RGB
Color Usage
configuration
Configuration Page
configuring
connection
connectivity
Index
355
control panel
Scan/Digital Send Settings
Stapler/Stacker Settings menu
USB Firmware Upgrade menu
copies changing number of
copy
from document feeder 176 from glass 176
optimize for text or pictures
restoring default settings 184
set options 183 special paper 183
copy settings
HP Embedded Web Server
Copy Settings menu, control
copying
cover pages
printing on different paper
custom print settings (Windows)
custom-size paper settings
customer support
D
default settings, copy
deleting
Demo Page
dial tone detection, setting 216
dialing mode
dialing prefix
digital send settings
HP Embedded Web Server
digital sending
digital sending utility, remote
Display Settings menu, control
document feeder copying two-sided documents
double-sided printing (duplexing)
drivers changing paper types and
changing settings (Windows)
DSS. See digital sending utility duplex alignment
duplex printing (double-sided)
E
E-mail feature
356 Index ENWW
Embedded Web Server (EWS)
Enhanced I/O (EIO) card
part number 323 partnumber 323
enlarge
envelopes
environment, specifications 338
Environmental Product Stewardship
error
error correction mode
error messages
errors
European Union, waste disposal
EWS. See embedded Web server
Explorer, versions supported
HP Embedded Web Server
F
fax
Fax Activity Log
Fax Reports
fax settings
HP Embedded Web Server
Fax Settings menu, control panel
File Directory Page
Finnish laser safety statement 350
firmware
first page printing on different paper
folders
fonts
formatter
forms
fuser
G
gateways
general configuration
HP Embedded Web Server
General Settings menu, control
gloss level
graphics, business
grayscale
group dial. See speed dial
H
hard disks
help printing options (Windows)
Help button, control panel
Home button, control panel
HP Easy Color
HP Embedded Web Server
copy settings 268 digital send settings 268
general configuration 267 information pages 267
network settings 271 other links list 271
print settings 268 scan settings 268
security settings 270 troubleshooting tools 270
HP Embedded Web Server (EWS)
ENWW Index 357
HP Jetdirect print server
I
information pages
HP Embedded Web Server
installing
product on wired networks,
product on wired networks,
interface ports
Internet Explorer, versions supported
HP Embedded Web Server
IP address
J
jams
JBIG compression
Jetdirect print server
job retention
job storage
jobs
jobs, print storing permanent copies
storing permanent private
storing temporarily
storing temporary copies
jobs, stored
receiving notification when
setting user names (Windows)
specifying names (Windows)
K
keys, control panel
L
labels
landscape orientation
laser safety statements 349, 350
Last Fax Call Report
last page printing on different paper
LDAP servers
letterhead
loading
log/report
lower-right door
M
Mac changing paper types and
sizes 66 driver settings 63, 66
supported operating systems
Macintosh
Macintosh driver settings
358 Index ENWW
maintenance kits
Manage Supplies menu, control
Manage Trays menu, control
marketing materials
Material Safety Data Sheet
media custom-size, Macintosh
memory
memory chip, print cartridge
memory DIMMs
memory lock
memory tag
memory, saving and deleting
menus
menus, control panel
messages
mixed sizes
multiple pages per sheet
N
n-up printing
names, job
Netscape Navigator, versions supported
HP embedded Web Server
network
password, changing 78 password, setting 78 settings, changing 78 settings, viewing 78
network settings
HP Embedded Web Server
Network Settings menu, control
networks
networks, wired
installing product, Windows
O
opening printer drivers
operating environment
operating systems supported 48,
ordering
orientation
other links list
HP Embedded Web Server
output area
output bin
output bins
P
page sizes scaling documents to fit
pages per sheet
paper covers, using different paper
custom-size, Macintosh
ENWW Index 359
first and last pages, using
printing on preprinted letterhead
paper pickup problems
paper size
paper sizes
selecting 135 selecting custom 135
paper types
paper, special
part numbers
maintenance kits 323 print cartridges 323 supplies 323
PBX systems troubleshooting 253
PCL drivers
PCL Font List
personal jobs storing temporarily
phone lines troubleshooting 253
photos
portrait orientation
ports
PostScript Printer Description (PPD) files
power
power connection
PPDs
prefix
preprinted paper
print cartridges
print job
print jobs storing permanent copies
storing permanent private
storing temporarily
storing temporary copies
print media
Print Options menu, control panel
print quality
print server card
print settings
HP Embedded Web Server
Print Settings menu, control panel
printer drivers
printer drivers (Mac)
printer drivers (Windows)
printing from USB storage accessories
printing on both sides
private jobs storing permanently
problem-solving
product. See multifunction product
product memory
sending to 196 product memory, scan to 196
proof and hold
pulse dialing
Q
quick copy jobs
R
recycling
HP printing supplies returns and
360 Index ENWW
redial-on-busy
redial-on-no-answer
reduce
regulatory statements environmental product
remote configuration
repeating defects,
Reports menu, control panel 18
required settings
resize documents
resolution
restoring default settings
retention, job
right door
S
save to device memory
save to network folder
save to USB
scale documents
scan
scan settings
HP Embedded Web Server
Scan/Digital Send Settings menu,
scanner
scanner glass
scanning to e-mail
scanning to product memory 196
secuity settings
HP Embedded Web Server
security
security slot
Send to E-mail
sending a fax
delete multiple recipients 243
using fax address book
sending to e-mail
Service menu, control panel 46
settings
shortcuts (Windows)
Sign in
sleep delay
sleep mode
Sleep Schedule
SMTP servers
software
installing, USB connections 73
ENWW Index 361
software license agreement
supported operating systems
solving
direct-connect problems 316 network problems 316
walk-up USB printing
special media
special paper
specifications
electrical and acoustic 338 operating environment 338
speed dial
Speed Dial List
staple options
stapler
Stapler/Stacker Settings menu,
staples
Start button, control panel
status
status, fax accessory page 250
Stop button, control panel
stopping a print request
storage, job
stored jobs
receiving notification when
setting user names (Windows)
specifying names (Windows)
storing
storing jobs permanent copies (Windows)
permanent private copies
proof and hold (Windows)
159 setting options (Windows) 159
temporary copies (Windows)
temporary personal jobs
supplies
status, viewing with HP Utility
supplies status page
support
system requirements
HP Embedded Web Server
T
TCP/IP manually configuring IPv4
manually configuring IPv6
technical support
tone dialing
toner cartridges. See print cartridges toner collection unit
top cover
transparencies
Tray 1
Tray 2
trays
troubleshooting
error messages, numerical list
362 Index ENWW
walk-up USB printing
Troubleshooting menu, control
troubleshooting tools
HP Embedded Web Server
two-sided printing
U
uninstalling Windows software 54
updates, downloading product
Usage Page
USB
USB Firmware Upgrade menu,
USB storage accessories
user names setting for stored jobs
V
W
Warning button, control panel
warranty
watermarks
Web browser requirements
HP Embedded Web Server
Web Jetadmin, remote
Web sites
HP Web Jetadmin,
Macintosh customer support
Material Safety Data Sheet
Windows
supported operating systems
ENWW
Index
363
364 Index ENWW
*CC419-90901*
*CC419-90901*
CC419-90901
advertisement
* Your assessment is very important for improving the workof artificial intelligence, which forms the content of this project
Related manuals
advertisement
Table of contents
- 21 Product basics
- 22 Product comparison
- 23 Environmental features
- 24 Accessibility features
- 25 Product views
- 25 Front view
- 25 CM4540 MFP
- 26 CM4540f MFP
- 27 CM4540fskm MFP
- 28 Back view
- 29 Interface ports
- 29 Serial number and model number location
- 30 Control-panel layout
- 31 Control-panel help
- 32 Touchscreen navigation
- 34 Buttons on the touchscreen
- 35 Control panel menus
- 36 Control panel menus
- 38 Administration menu
- 38 Reports menu
- 39 General Settings menu
- 43 Copy Settings menu
- 47 Scan/Digital Send Settings menu
- 49 Fax Settings menu
- 53 Print Settings menu
- 54 Print Options menu
- 55 Display Settings menu
- 57 Manage Supplies menu
- 58 Manage Trays menu
- 59 Stapler/Stacker Settings menu
- 59 Network Settings menu
- 62 Troubleshooting menu
- 65 Device Maintenance menu
- 65 Backup/Restore menu
- 65 Calibration/Cleaning menu
- 66 USB Firmware Upgrade menu
- 66 Service menu
- 67 Software for Windows
- 68 Supported operating systems for Windows
- 69 Supported printer drivers for Windows
- 70 Select the correct printer driver for Windows
- 71 HP Universal Print Driver (UPD)
- 71 UPD installation modes
- 72 Priority for print settings
- 73 Change printer-driver settings for Windows
- 73 Change the settings for all print jobs until the software program is closed
- 73 Change the default settings for all print jobs
- 73 Change the product configuration settings
- 74 Remove software for Windows
- 75 Supported utilities for Windows
- 75 HP Web Jetadmin
- 75 HP Embedded Web Server
- 76 Software for other operating systems
- 77 Use the product with Mac
- 78 Software for Mac
- 78 Supported operating systems for Mac
- 78 Supported printer drivers for Mac
- 78 Install software for Mac operating systems
- 78 Install software for Mac computers connected directly to the product
- 79 Install software for Mac computers on a wired network
- 79 Configure the IP address
- 80 Install the software
- 81 Remove software from Mac operating systems
- 83 Priority for print settings for Mac
- 83 Change printer-driver settings for Mac
- 84 Software for Mac computers
- 84 HP Utility for Mac
- 84 Open the HP Printer Utility
- 84 HP Utility features
- 85 Supported utilities for Mac
- 85 HP Embedded Web Server
- 86 Print with Mac
- 86 Cancel a print job with Mac
- 86 Change the paper size and type with Mac
- 86 Create and use printing presets with Mac
- 87 Resize documents or print on a custom paper size with Mac
- 87 Print a cover page with Mac
- 87 Use watermarks with Mac
- 88 Print multiple pages on one sheet of paper with Mac
- 88 Print on both sides (duplex) with Mac
- 89 Store jobs with Mac
- 89 Set the color options with Mac
- 90 Solve problems with a Mac
- 91 Connect the product
- 92 Printer sharing disclaimer
- 93 Connect with USB
- 93 CD installation
- 93 Connect to a network
- 94 Supported network protocols
- 95 Install the product on a wired network
- 95 Configure the IP address
- 97 Install the software
- 98 Configure network settings
- 98 View or change network settings
- 98 Set or change the network password
- 99 Manually configure IPv4 TCP/IP parameters from the control panel
- 100 Manually configure IPv6 TCP/IP parameters from the control panel
- 101 Paper and print media
- 102 Understand paper use
- 102 Special paper guidelines
- 104 Change the printer driver to match the paper type and size in Windows
- 105 Supported paper sizes
- 108 Supported paper types
- 110 Load paper trays
- 110 Load Tray 1
- 112 Load Tray 2 and optional Trays 3, 4, and 5 with standard-size paper
- 113 Load Tray 2 and optional Trays 3, 4, and 5 with custom-size paper
- 116 Tray and bin capacity
- 118 Paper orientation for loading trays
- 118 Paper orientation for loading Tray 1
- 120 Paper orientation for loading Tray 2 or Trays 3, 4, and 5
- 121 Configure trays
- 121 Configure a tray when loading paper
- 121 Configure a tray to match print job settings
- 121 Configure a tray by using the control panel
- 122 Automatic paper sensing (auto-sense mode)
- 122 Auto-sense settings
- 123 Select an output bin (fskm models only)
- 125 Manage supplies
- 126 Print cartridge information
- 127 Supplies views
- 127 Print cartridge views
- 128 Manage print cartridges
- 128 Settings for print cartridges
- 128 Print when a print cartridge is at estimated end of life
- 128 Enable or disable the Very Low Settings options from the control panel
- 129 Recycle supplies
- 129 Print-cartridge storage
- 129 HP policy on non-HP print cartridges
- 129 HP fraud hotline and Web site
- 130 Replacement instructions
- 130 Replace print cartridges
- 132 Replace the toner collection unit
- 135 Replace the staple cartridge
- 136 Solve problems with supplies
- 136 Check the print cartridges
- 137 Inspect the print cartridge for damage
- 138 Repeating defects
- 139 Print the Supplies Status page
- 140 Interpret control panel messages for supplies
- 147 Print tasks
- 148 Cancel a print job with Windows
- 149 Basic print tasks with Windows
- 149 Open the printer driver with Windows
- 150 Get help for any printing option with Windows
- 150 Change the number of print copies with Windows
- 151 Save custom print settings for reuse with Windows
- 151 Use a printing shortcut with Windows
- 152 Create printing shortcuts
- 155 Improve print quality with Windows
- 155 Select the page size with Windows
- 155 Select a custom page size with Windows
- 155 Select the paper type with Windows
- 155 Select the paper tray with Windows
- 155 Select the gloss level with Windows
- 156 Print on both sides (duplex) with Windows
- 157 Print multiple pages per sheet with Windows
- 159 Select page orientation with Windows
- 161 Set color options with Windows
- 163 Additional print tasks with Windows
- 163 Print colored text as black (grayscale) with Windows
- 163 Print on preprinted letterhead or forms with Windows
- 165 Print on special paper, labels, or transparencies
- 168 Print the first or last page on different paper with Windows
- 170 Scale a document to fit page size with Windows
- 172 Add a watermark to a document with Windows
- 172 Create a booklet with Windows
- 174 Select output options with Windows (fskm models only)
- 174 Select an output bin with Windows
- 175 Select staple options with Windows
- 177 Use job storage features with Windows
- 177 Create a stored job with Windows
- 178 Print a stored job
- 179 Delete a stored job
- 179 Set job storage options with Windows
- 179 Print one copy for proof before printing all the copies
- 180 Temporarily store a personal job on the product and print it later
- 180 Temporarily store a job on the product
- 180 Permanently store a job on the product
- 181 Make a permanently stored job private so that anyone who tries to print it must provide a PIN
- 181 Receive notification when someone prints a stored job
- 181 Set the user name for a stored job
- 181 Specify a name for the stored job
- 182 Print special jobs with Windows
- 182 Print business graphics or marketing material
- 182 Supported glossy paper
- 183 Print weatherproof maps and outdoor signs
- 183 Supported tough paper
- 183 Set the duplex alignment
- 184 Walk-up USB printing
- 187 Color
- 188 Adjust color
- 188 Change the color theme for a print job
- 189 Change the color options
- 190 Manual color options
- 191 Use the HP EasyColor option
- 192 Match colors
- 192 Sample book color matching
- 193 Print color samples
- 193 PANTONE® color matching
- 195 Copy
- 196 Use copy functions
- 196 Copy
- 196 Cancel a copy job
- 197 Reduce or enlarge a copy image
- 198 Collate a copy job
- 198 Make color copies or black and white copies
- 199 Copy settings
- 199 Change copy quality
- 199 Optimize the copy image for text or pictures
- 199 Check the scanner glass for dirt or smudges
- 201 Adjust the copy lightness/darkness
- 203 Define custom copy settings
- 203 Set the paper size and type for copying on special paper
- 204 Restore copy default settings
- 205 Copy a book
- 206 Copy a photo
- 207 Create a stored copy job
- 208 Copy mixed-size originals
- 209 Copy on both sides (duplex)
- 210 Use Job Build mode
- 211 Scan and send documents
- 212 Set up scan/send features
- 214 Use scan/send functions
- 214 Sign in
- 214 Change default scan/send settings from the product control panel
- 215 Send a scanned document
- 215 Send a scanned document to a network folder
- 216 Send a scanned document to a folder in the product memory
- 217 Send a scanned document to a USB flash drive
- 218 Send to e-mail
- 219 Supported protocols
- 219 Configure e-mail server settings
- 220 Send a scanned document to one or more e-mail addresses
- 222 Use the address book
- 222 Add contacts to the address book from the product control panel
- 223 Send a document to e-mail by using the address book
- 225 Fax
- 226 Setup
- 226 Introduction
- 226 HP LaserJet Analog Fax Accessory 500 features
- 227 Verify fax operation
- 227 Required fax settings
- 228 Fax Setup Wizard
- 229 Set or verify the date and time
- 229 Set or verify the date/time format
- 230 Set fax settings
- 230 Remote fax configuration
- 230 Web browser
- 230 HP Web Jetadmin
- 231 HP MFP Digital Sending Software Configuration Utility
- 231 Send fax settings
- 231 Fax send setup
- 231 Fax Setup Wizard
- 233 Fax dialing settings
- 233 Set the fax dial volume
- 233 Set the dialing mode
- 234 Set fax send speed
- 234 Set the redial interval
- 235 Set redial on error
- 235 Set redial-on-busy
- 236 Set redial-on-no-answer
- 236 Set the dial tone detection
- 236 Set a dialing prefix (if required)
- 237 General fax send settings
- 237 Activate Fax Number Confirmation
- 238 Enable PC fax send
- 238 Fax header
- 238 Set the JBIG compression mode
- 239 Set the error correction mode
- 239 Set billing codes
- 240 Default job options
- 241 Image preview
- 241 Set the outgoing fax resolution
- 242 Original sides
- 242 Notification
- 243 Content orientation
- 243 Original size
- 244 Image adjustment
- 244 Optimize text/picture
- 245 Job build
- 245 Blank page suppression
- 246 Receive fax settings
- 246 Fax receive setup
- 246 Set the ringer volume
- 246 Set rings-to-answer
- 247 Set fax receive speed
- 247 Set ring interval
- 247 Set ring frequency
- 248 Enable or disable the fax printing schedule
- 248 Block incoming faxes
- 249 Create a blocked-fax list
- 249 Delete numbers from the blocked-fax list
- 249 Initiate polling receive
- 250 Default job options
- 250 Notification
- 251 Stamp received faxes (incoming faxes)
- 251 Set fit-to-page
- 252 Set the paper selection
- 252 Set the output bin
- 253 Set the sides
- 253 Set the paper tray
- 253 Fax archive and forwarding
- 254 Enable fax archiving
- 254 Enable fax forwarding
- 255 Use Fax
- 255 Fax feature screen
- 256 Status message bar
- 256 Send a fax
- 257 Send a fax by entering numbers manually
- 258 Send a fax using speed dial
- 258 Search a speed-dial list by name
- 259 Send a fax by using fax address book numbers
- 260 Fax address book search
- 260 Cancel a fax
- 260 Cancel the current fax transmission
- 260 Cancel pending faxes
- 261 Receive faxes
- 261 Create or delete speed dial lists
- 261 Create a speed dial list
- 263 Delete a speed dial list
- 264 Delete a single number from the speed dial list
- 265 Add a number to an existing speed dial list
- 266 Voice Calls and Retries
- 266 Fax Call Report
- 267 Fax Activity Log
- 267 T.30 Report
- 267 Scheduling fax printing (memory lock)
- 268 Use Fax over VoIP networks
- 269 Solve fax problems
- 269 Is your fax set up correctly?
- 269 What type of phone line are you using?
- 269 Are you using a surge-protection device?
- 270 Are you using a phone company voice-messaging service or an answering machine?
- 270 Does your phone line have a call-waiting feature?
- 270 Check fax accessory status
- 271 Fax feature is not operating
- 271 General fax problems
- 272 Problems with receiving faxes
- 273 Problems with sending faxes
- 274 Error codes
- 274 Fax error messages
- 276 Send-fax messages
- 278 Receive-fax messages
- 279 Fax reports
- 279 Fax activity log
- 280 Billing code report
- 280 Blocked fax list report
- 280 Speed dial list report
- 280 Fax call report
- 280 Clear the fax activity log
- 281 Service settings
- 281 Settings in the Troubleshooting menu
- 281 Settings in the Resets menu
- 282 Firmware upgrades
- 283 Manage and maintain
- 284 Print information pages
- 286 Use the HP Embedded Web Server
- 286 Open the HP Embedded Web Server by using a network connection
- 287 HP Embedded Web Server features
- 287 Information tab
- 287 General tab
- 288 Copy/Print tab
- 288 Scan/Digital Send tab
- 289 Fax tab
- 290 Troubleshooting tab
- 290 Security tab
- 291 Networking tab
- 291 Other Links list
- 292 Use HP Web Jetadmin software
- 293 Product security features
- 293 Security statements
- 293 IP Security
- 293 Secure the HP Embedded Web Server
- 293 Encryption support: HP Encrypted High Performance Hard Disks
- 294 Secure stored jobs
- 294 Lock the control panel menus
- 294 Lock the formatter
- 295 Economy settings
- 295 Optimize speed or energy use
- 295 Powersave modes
- 295 Set sleep mode
- 296 Set sleep delay
- 296 Set the sleep schedule
- 297 Install external I/O cards
- 299 Clean the product
- 299 Clean the paper path
- 299 Clean the scanner glass
- 302 Product updates
- 303 Solve problems
- 304 Self help
- 305 Solve problems checklist
- 306 Factors that affect product performance
- 307 Restore factory settings
- 308 Interpret control-panel messages
- 308 Control-panel message types
- 308 Control-panel messages
- 309 Paper feeds incorrectly or becomes jammed
- 309 The product does not pick up paper
- 309 The product picks up multiple sheets of paper
- 309 Prevent paper jams
- 310 Clear jams
- 310 Jam locations
- 312 Clear jams in the document feeder
- 313 Clear paper jams in the stapler
- 314 Clear staple jams
- 317 Clear jams in the output bin area
- 317 Clear jams from under the top cover
- 319 Clear jams in the right door
- 322 Clear jams in Tray 1
- 324 Clear jams in Trays 2, 3, 4, or 5
- 325 Clear jams in the lower-right door (Trays 3, 4, or 5)
- 326 Change jam recovery
- 327 Improve print quality
- 327 Select a paper type
- 327 Use paper that meets HP specifications
- 328 Print a cleaning page
- 328 Calibrate the product
- 328 Set the image registration
- 329 Internal print-quality-test pages
- 329 Check the print cartridge
- 330 Use the printer driver that best meets your printing needs
- 331 Improve print quality for copies
- 332 The product does not print or it prints slowly
- 332 The product does not print
- 333 The product prints slowly
- 334 Solve walk-up USB printing problems
- 334 The Open from USB menu does not open when you insert the USB accessory
- 334 The file does not print from the USB storage accessory
- 335 The file that you want to print is not listed in the Open from USB menu
- 336 Solve connectivity problems
- 336 Solve direct-connect problems
- 336 Solve network problems
- 336 Poor physical connection
- 336 The computer is using the incorrect IP address for the product
- 337 The computer is unable to communicate with the product
- 337 The product is using incorrect link and duplex settings for the network
- 337 New software programs might be causing compatibility problems
- 337 The computer or workstation might be set up incorrectly
- 337 The product is disabled, or other network settings are incorrect
- 338 Solve product software problems with Windows
- 339 Solve product software problems with Mac
- 339 The printer driver is not listed in the Print & Fax list
- 339 The product name does not appear in the product list in the Print & Fax list
- 339 The printer driver does not automatically set up the selected product in the Print & Fax list
- 340 A print job was not sent to the product that you wanted
- 340 When connected with a USB cable, the product does not appear in the Print & Fax list after the drive ...
- 340 You are using a generic printer driver when using a USB connection
- 341 Product supplies and accessories
- 342 Order parts, accessories, and supplies
- 343 Part numbers
- 343 Accessories
- 343 Cables and interfaces
- 343 Customer self-repair parts
- 347 Service and support
- 348 Hewlett-Packard limited warranty statement
- 349 HP's Premium Protection Warranty: LaserJet print cartridge limited warranty statement
- 350 Color LaserJet Fuser Kit, Transfer Kit, and Roller Kit Limited Warranty Statement
- 351 Data stored on the print cartridge
- 352 End User License Agreement
- 354 OpenSSL
- 355 Customer self-repair warranty service
- 356 Customer support
- 357 Product specifications
- 358 Physical specifications
- 358 Power consumption, electrical specifications, and acoustic emissions
- 358 Environmental specifications
- 359 Regulatory information
- 360 FCC regulations
- 361 Environmental product stewardship program
- 361 Protecting the environment
- 361 Ozone production
- 361 Power consumption
- 361 Paper use
- 361 Plastics
- 361 HP LaserJet print supplies
- 362 Return and recycling instructions
- 362 United States and Puerto Rico
- 362 Multiple returns (more than one cartridge)
- 362 Single returns
- 362 Shipping
- 362 Residents of Alaska and Hawaii
- 363 Non-U.S. returns
- 363 Paper
- 363 Material restrictions
- 364 Disposal of waste equipment by users in private households in the European Union
- 364 Chemical substances
- 364 Material Safety Data Sheet (MSDS)
- 364 For more information
- 365 Declaration of Conformity
- 367 Declaration of Conformity (fax models)
- 369 Safety statements
- 369 Laser safety
- 369 Canadian DOC regulations
- 369 VCCI statement (Japan)
- 369 Power cord instructions
- 369 Power cord statement (Japan)
- 370 EMC statement (China)
- 370 EMC statement (Korea)
- 370 EMI statement (Taiwan)
- 370 Laser statement for Finland
- 371 Substances Table (China)
- 371 Restriction on Hazardous Substances statement (Turkey)
- 372 Additional statements for telecom (fax) products
- 372 EU Statement for Telecom Operation
- 372 New Zealand Telecom Statements
- 372 Additional FCC statement for telecom products (US)
- 373 Telephone Consumer Protection Act (US)
- 373 Industry Canada CS-03 requirements
- 374 Japan Telecom Mark
- 375 Index